User manual | MTS8000 US rev19.book - Troubleshooting Input Queue Drops and

Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter . . . 182

Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source . 182

Display of results and command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Result of the measurement in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Commands of the power meter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Making a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Optical link loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

FOX Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement . . . . . . 186

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Results screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

File Storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Establishing a reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Establishing a reference for loss measurement . . . . . . . . . 189

Taking a side by side reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Taking the reference in a loop-back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement . . . . . . 191

ORL Emitted power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

ORL Zero adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Choosing the fiber to be tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Identifying the distant module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Displaying results for a FOX automatic measurement . . . . 194

User Manual 780000102/19 xv

Table of Contents

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Sending a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Manual ORL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement 197

Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Display of results for an ORL manual measurement . . . . . 198

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Storing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Recalling files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Multi Test Access Unit 201

Function of the MTAU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Configuration of the sequence of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Performing the sequence of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Use of the Fiber Characterization script . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Connect the modules to the MTAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Launching the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Broadband source BBS 213

Function of the BBS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Activation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Remote interlock connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

File management 217

File configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Managing tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

File signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

xvi User Manual 780000102/19

Table of Contents

File information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Current directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Rules for naming files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Name of a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Auto store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

File Type / Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Fiber Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Fiber ID and Fiber Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Fiber Nbr Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Link description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Extremities are different . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Cable Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

End Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Cable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

File export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Buttons on the right of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Explorer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Description of the explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Storage media built into the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

External USB storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Standard Compact Flash card (8000 platform only) . . . . . 232

Remote Base Unit and data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Abbreviations for storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Directory edit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Selection of directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Edition of directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

File editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Format of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Easy file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Multiple selection of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Commands relating to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Saving Files from the Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

User Manual 780000102/19 xvii

Table of Contents

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

xviii

Loading files and displaying traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Simple loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Load with configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Load Trace + Info (with OTDR files only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Display of several traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Link Manager Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only) . . . . . . . . . . 242

Macros 245

Calling the Macro function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Macro recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

File macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Adding interaction to your macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Inserting a dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Inserting a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Inserting a pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Renaming a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

The «Overwrite Config.» setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Replacing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Removing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

How to use the default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

How to set a macro as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Macro playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Storing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Technical specifications 253

OTDR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

OTDR measurements characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

OTDR measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Distance Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

WDM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Typical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

PMD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 17

Table of Contents

ODM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

ODM MR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

High Resolution Dispersion test solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

BBS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Information on «fiber» modules 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 . . 267

MTAU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

OFI modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Standalone power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Options and accessories 271

References of measurement plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

OTDR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

WDM / PMD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

ODM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

BBS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

MTAU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

OFI Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Launch Fiber Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

User manual references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

References of optical connectors and adapters . . . . . . . 276

References of result processing software . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Appendix A

Index

RoHS Information 279

Concerned products: 8100 modules series . . . . . . . . . . 280

Concerned products: OTDR 8100 Modules Series . . . . . 281

Concerned products: All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series .

282

Concerned products: PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

283

285

User Manual 780000102/19 xix

Table of Contents

xx User Manual 780000102/19

About this guide

The MTS/TBERD series of JDSU provides a portable, modular platform designed for the construction, validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks.

The modules described in this document are applicable for the following platforms:

– MTS 8000

– T-BERD 8000

– MTS 6000

– T-BERD 6000

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Purpose and scope” on page xxii

–

“Assumptions” on page xxii

–

“Technical assistance” on page xxii

–

“Recycling Information” on page xxiii

–

“Conventions” on page xxiii

User Manual 780000102/19 xxi

About this guide

Purpose and scope

Purpose and scope

The purpose of this guide is to help you successfully use the MTS / T-

BERD features and capabilities. This guide includes task-based instructions that describe how to install, configure, use, and troubleshoot the

MTS / T-BERD. Additionally, this guide provides a complete description of JDSU’s warranty, services, and repair information, including terms and conditions of the licensing agreement.

Assumptions

This guide is intended for novice, intermediate, and experienced users who want to use the MTS / T-BERD effectively and efficiently. We are assuming that you are familiar with basic telecommunication concepts and terminology.

Technical assistance

If you need assistance or have questions related to the use of this product, call or e-mail JDSU’s Technical Assistance Center for customer support.

Table 1

Technical assistance centers

Region

Americas



Telecom Products

Europe, Africa, and

Mid-East

Asia and the Pacific

Southeast Asia, Australia, and New

Zealand

All others

Phone Number

866 228 3762



World Wide: 301 353 1550

+49 (0) 7121 86 1345



(Europe)

+33 (0) 1 30 81 50 60



(JDSU France)

+852 2892 0990



(Hong Kong)

+86 10 6833 7477



(Beijing-China)

866 228 3762 [email protected]

“Principle of reflectometry measurements” on page 2

xxii User Manual 780000102/19

About this guide

Recycling Information

During off-hours, you can request assistance by doing one of the following:

– leave a voice mail message at the Technical Assistance number in your region

– e-mail North American Technical Assistance Center, [email protected]

, or European Technical Assistance Center, [email protected]

– submit your question using our online Technical Assistance Request form at www.jdsu.com

Recycling Information

JDSU recommends that customers dispose of their instruments and peripherals in an environnmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products components, and/or materials.

Waste Electrical and electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

In the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste. Il should be deposited at an appropriate facility to enable recovery and recycling.

Conventions

This guide uses naming conventions and symbols, as described in the following tables.

Table 2

Typographical conventions

Description

User interface actions appear in this

typeface

Buttons or switches that you press on a unit appear in this

YPEFACE

Code and output messages appear in this typeface.

Example

On the Status bar, click

Start

Press the

switch.

All results okay

User Manual 780000102/19 xxiii

About this guide

Conventions

Table 2

Typographical conventions (Continued)

Description

Text you must type exactly as shown appears in this

typeface

Variables appear in this type-

face

Book references appear in this

typeface

A vertical bar | means “or”: only one option can appear in a single command.

Square brackets [ ] indicate an optional argument.

Slanted brackets < > group required arguments.

Example

Type:

a:\set.exe

in the dialog box.

Type the new hostname.

Refer to Newton’s Telecom

Dictionary

platform [a|b|e] login [platform name]

Table 3

Keyboard and menu conventions

Description

A plus sign + indicates simultaneous keystrokes.

A comma indicates consecutive key strokes.

A slanted bracket indicates choosing a submenu from menu.

Example

Press

Ctrl+s

Press

Alt+f,s

On the menu bar, click



Start > Program Files

Table 4

Symbol conventions

This symbol represents a general hazard.

xxiv User Manual 780000102/19

This symbol represents a risk of electrical shock.

About this guide

Conventions

NOTE

This symbol represents a Note indicating related information or tip.

This symbol, located on the equipment or its packaging, indicates that the equipment must not be disposed of in a land-fill site or as municipal waste, and should be disposed of according to your national regulations.

Table 5

Safety definitions

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

User Manual 780000102/19 xxv

About this guide

Conventions

xxvi User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

This chapter gives the principles of the measurements made by the reflectometer (OTDR) plug-ins, OSA spectrum analyzers (WDM technology) and PMD analyzers (Polarization mode dispersion).

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

–

“Principle of bi-directional measurement” on page 4

–

“Principle of WDM system testing” on page 5

–

“PMD principle” on page 7

–

“Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using phase shift method” on page 9

–

“Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)” on page 10

–

“Standards and l0 for different types of fiber” on page 11

User Manual 780000102/19 1

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of reflectometry measurements

Principle of reflectometry measurements

Optical time domain reflectometry consists in injecting a light pulse into one end of the optical fiber to be analyzed and observing, at the same end, the optical intensity passing through the fiber in the opposite direction to the propagation of the pulse.



The signal detected is exponentially diminishing in form, typical of the phenomenon of backscattering, with superimposed peaks due to reflections from the ends of the fiber or other variations in the refractive index.

Fig. 1

Trace showing typical backscattering

Information yielded by the measurement

From a backscatter trace it is possible, in particular, to determine the position of a section of fiber within a link. The measurement result must reveal:

– the attenuation

– the location of faults, by their distance from a point of origin,

– attenuation with respect to distance (dB/km)

– the reflectance of a reflective event or a link.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of reflectometry measurements

To locate faults, a reflectometer measures only time. Consequently, group velocity must be introduced in order to determine the distance of the location. This is done by introducing the refractive index of the fiber into the instrument.

Validity of

Measurement

UTI-T, in recommendations G.650, G.651 and G.652, give backscatter measurement as an alternative method for measuring attenuation, the method of reference being the cut fiber.

The field of application of backscatter is not limited, but the conditions for application of this method are nevertheless stipulated:

– injection conditions: Fresnel reflections must be limited at fiber input.

– a high-power source (laser) should be used.

– receiver bandwidth should be chosen to achieve a compromise between pulse rise time and noise level.

– backscatter power should be represented on a logarithmic scale.

Reflectance

Reflectance is a value with which the coefficient of reflection of a reflecting optical element can be quantified. It is defined as the ratio of the power reflected by the element over the incident power.

These reflections are due to variations in refractive index all along the optical link in certain telecommunications applications. If they are not controlled, they may degrade the performance of the system by perturbing the operation of the emitting laser (especially DFB lasers) or may generate interference noise in the receiver by multiple reflections.

The reflectometer is particularly well suited to the measurement of discrete reflectances on an optical fiber link. To calculate the coefficient of reflection, it is necessary to measure the total amplitude of the Fresnel reflection generated and then to apply a conversion formula to obtain the reflectance value.

This formula takes into account:

– the total amplitude of the reflection measured by the reflectometer.

– the pulse width used to measure the amplitude of the reflection (in nanoseconds)

– the backscatter coefficient of the fiber used:

User Manual 780000102/19 3

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of bi-directional measurement

– typical values of the backscatter coefficient for a pulse of 1 ns and



- for a single-mode fiber:-79 dB to 1310 nm



-81 dB to 1550 nm and 1625 nm



- for a multi-mode fiber:-70 dB to 850 nm



-75 dB to 1300 nm

NOTE

To measure the widest range of reflection coefficient, it is necessary to insert a variable optical attenuator between the reflectometer and the link to be tested. This attenuator enables the level of the trace to be adjusted so as to avoid saturation of the reflectometer by the reflection to be evaluated.

Principle of bi-directional measurement

If fibers with different mode-field diameters (core size etc.) are joined, the resulting OTDR trace waveform can show a higher backscattering level.

This is due to the increased level of backscattered signal reflected back to the OTDR in the downstream fiber.

Fig. 2

Normal splice

This phenomenon can occur when jointing different types of fiber in multimode or 2 fibers with different backscattering coefficients.

4 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of WDM system testing

Fig. 3

Positive splice (A ->B) / Negative Splice (B -> A)

The sum gives the bi-directional or average splice loss value:

S =

S1 +

Bi-directionnal measurement consists in performing a measurement from the extremity of fiber A, then another measurement from the extremity of fiber B, finally get events of both traces and calculate the average for all slope, splice and reflectance measurements.

Principle of WDM system testing

WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplex) technology is a very effective means of increasing the transmission of fibers, as it demands neither the installation of new links, nor any increase in transmission speed. The data are transmitted along the fiber at different wavelengths, each wavelength (or channel) transmitting a signal. The channels are defined according to the the G-692 recommendations of the ITU-T.

This technology demands new measurements, since it is important, during the installation and maintenance of WDM systems, to check the following parameters:

Presence of the channels at the corresponding wavelengths, with no drift

Correct channel power levels, without power variation

Satisfactory signal-to-noise ratio (SNR): its value is obtained by measuring the ratio of channel peak power to the noise power level of the ASE

signal to the right and/or left of the carrier. As a general

1.Amplified Spontaneous Emission

User Manual 780000102/19 5

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of WDM system testing

rule, the noise measurement point chosen is the calculated midpoint between two adjacent channels. The noise power level measured is converted to a standard bandwidth of 0.1 nm.

The most important item of equipment for carrying out these tests on

WDM systems is the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA). It can be connected at critical measurement points in the WDM system, to the ends of the links or to the amplifier locations.

Measurement results

The optical analyzer displays a spectrum representing all the channels.

The measurement results are shown in the form of a complete spectrum analysis and a table of the parameters relating to each carrier.

The optical spectrum analyzer performs automatic detection and measurements on each channel.

The results of a scanned spectrum (trace) are:

– the amount of automatec detected channels depend on a adjustable power threshold

– the total optical power (dBm or Watt) at the selected sweep range:

– the wavelength

– the wavelength spacing between channels

– the power level

– the noise at 0.1nm noise acquisition bandwidth

– the SNR signal-to-noise ratio

– the P/Pcomp

The sweep modes Statistics and Drift measure and report time depended changes at wavelength, power and SNR of the signal in a min-, maxtable.

To qualify signal and components special measurement types supports these characterisation: system data signals, EDFAs, DFB-Lasers, LEDsources, FP-Lasers.

Measurement types: WDM, DFB, EDFA, LED, FPL, filter/DROP

DFB analysis

In order to ensure the best BER ratio, it is sometimes necessary to be able to test DFB lasers, widely used in DWDM technology.

DFB measurements are the following :

6 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

PMD principle

–

SMSR

Mode Offset

Side mode Suppression Ratio : the amplitude difference between the main spectral component and the largest side mode.

Wavalength separation (expressed in nm) between the main spectral component and the

SMSR mode.

– Peak Amplitude The power level of the main spectral component of the DFB laser.

– Bandwidth Displayed bandwidth of the main spectral component of the DFB laser.

Peak of the main spectral component

Bandwidth

Side Mode Supression

Ratio

Fig. 4

Min offset

DFB measurements

Max offset

PMD principle

The transmission rate and range are two of the most important parameters of fiber optics paths and must therefore be optimized. And, since more and more paths (including those already installed) are being used for transmitting Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM) signals or for bit rates of 10 Gbit/s, it is becoming all the more important to determine the

Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).

PMD, which is the basic property of single-mode fibers, in particular affects the magnitude of the transmission rate. It results from the difference in propagation times of the energy of a given wavelength, which is split into two polarization layers that are at right angles to each other (as

User Manual 780000102/19 7

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

PMD principle

shown in the below diagram). The main causes of this birefringence are non-circularities of the fiber itself and external stress on the fiber (macrobending, micro-bending, twist and temperature variations).

Singl e-Mo de fib er sp an

DGD

Fig. 5

Example of a time delay between two polarization layers

The PMD is also referred to as mean value of all Differential Group

Delays (DGD) in picoseconds (ps) or as the DGD coefficient in ps/

km.

The mean DGD causes the transmission pulse to broaden when transmitted along the fiber, generating distortion, which in turns increases the bit-error-rate (BER) of the optical system. The consequence is that the

PMD limits the transmission bit rate on a link. It is then important to know the PMD values to calculate what are the bit rate limits of the links.

Method used to measure the

PMD

The method used to measure the PMD is based on the Fixed Analyzer

Method

which requires a broadband polarized source at one extremity, and a polarized (variable) Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA) at the other extremity.

Broadband light source

(SLED)

Fixed

Polarizer

Rotatable



Polarizer

Optical Spectrum

Analyser (OSA)

Link under test

Fig. 6

Fixed Analyzer Method used to measure the PMD

The method used to measure PMD is the Fast Fourier Transform Method

(FFT).

From the spectrum, the mean period of the amplitude modulation is measured.

1.This is standardized by the ANSI/TIA/EIA FOTP-113 Polarization Mode Disper-

sion Measurement for Single-Mode Optical Fibers by the Fixed Analyzer Method.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using phase shift method

The Fast Fourier Transform Method into a time distribution will give a

Gaussian curve and the mean DGD value is determined from this curve

(for fiber links with strong mode coupling).

It is not necessary to modify the polarization angle of the analyzer when strong mode coupling is used. For weak mode coupling, an angle could be selected to get the maximum amplitude of the modulation.

The instrument should have a higher dynamic range than the link itself.

A 35 dB dynamic range is usually enough for most of the applications, and 45 dB should be used for very long distance networks.

The measurement range of the PMD should be linked with the transmission rate. For WDM applications, it should be between 0.1 ps to 60 ps so that measurement can be carried out for bit rates between 2.5 and 40

Gbit/s. The table below indicates the maximum permitted PMD values for various bit rates.

Bit rate (Gbit/s)

2.5

10Gbps Ethernet

Maximum PMD

(ps)

2.5

PMD coefficient (ps/

km)

400 km cable length

< 2

< 0.5

< 0.125

–

Tables at the end of chapter gives information about the appropriate

standards and limits.

Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using phase shift method

The Phase shift method

A modulated broadband light is sent over the Fiber Under Test. The phase of the test signal is compared to the phase of the reference signal.

The measured value is the group delay, corresponding to a wavelength interval between the reference phase and the test wavelength phase. It is measured in the frequency domain, by detecting, recording and

User Manual 780000102/19 9

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)

processing the phase shift of The modulated signals. The fibre chromatic dispersion is derived from the measurement of the relative group delay using an approximation formula.

Fig. 7

CD ODM measurement using phase shift method

Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)

Power measurement

A power meter, is all that is needed to measure emitted or received power:

– to measure emitted power, connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter;

– to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver, the power meter is connected to the end of the fiber, at the point where the optical receiver would be connected.

Attenuation measurements

(optical link loss)

For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in elements such as sections of fiber, connections or optical components, a light source and a power meter are required.

This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points:

Laser light source of the

Base Unit

1 2

Power meter of the Base Unit

Reference fiber

Link under test

Attenuation A

(dB)

= P1

(dBm)

- P2

(dBm)

To perform accurate measurements, the following conditions are vital

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Standards and l0 for different types of fiber

– Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature.

– Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean.

– Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject.

If several measurements are to be made under identical light injection conditions, this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place.

Insertion loss method

The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the reference fiber: P1 is measured.

Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter: P2 is measured.

The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test.

It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested, to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2.

Standards and

0 for different types of fiber

Fibre

non-offset dispersion

Standard ITU/Y

Standard IEC

ITU-T G.652

IEC 60793-1-1

 type B1

Standard TIA/EIA Iva

Approximate



0 .

1310 nm

offset dispersion

ITU-T G.653

IEC 60793-1-1

 type B2

IVb

1550 nm

non-zero or homogeneous offset dispersion

ITU-T G.655

IEC 60793-1-1

 type B3

IVb

1500 nm or indefinite

Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone

Single Mode Fiber Type ITU-T

Dispersion unshifted fiber

(standard fiber)

G.652

Wavelength Range

around 1310 nm

1550 nm region

Full wavelength range

(1260 - 1640 nm)

Approximation

3-term Sellmeier

Quadratic

5-term Sellmeier

User Manual 780000102/19 11

Chapter 1

Principles of measurement

Standards and l0 for different types of fiber

Single Mode Fiber Type ITU-T

Dispersion shifted fiber

Non-dispersion shifted fiber

Wideband NZDSF

Mixed fibers

Wavelength Range

G.653

G.655

G.656

1550 nm region

Full wavelength range

(1260 - 1640 nm)

1550 nm region

Full wavelength range

(1260 - 1640 nm)

Full wavelength range

(1260 - 1640 nm) including DCF 1550 nm region

Full wavelength range

(1260 - 1640 nm)

Approximation

Quadratic

5-term Sellmeier

Quadratic

5-term Sellmeier

Quadratic

5-term Sellmeier

12 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 2

Getting started

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Unpacking the device - Precautions” on page 14

–

“Installing a plug-in in a receptacle and removing it” on page 14

–

“Universal connectors and adapters” on page 15

User Manual 780000102/19 13

Chapter 2

Getting started

Unpacking the device - Precautions

Unpacking the device - Precautions

We suggest that you keep the original packing material. It is designed for reuse (unless it is damaged during shipping). Using the original packing material ensures that the device is properly protected during shipping.

If another packaging is used (for returning the equipment for example),

JDSU cannot give warranty on good protection of the equipment.

If needed, you can obtain appropriate packing materials by contacting

JDSU Technical Assistance Center.

Installing a plug-in in a receptacle and removing it

A plug-in may be inserted into either of the two slots provided for the purpose.

When a slot is vacant, it is closed by means of a cover-plate fitted with two captive screws like those on the plug-ins.

Fig. 8

Captive screws securing the plug-in

Rear view of the Base Unit (example)

Inserting a plug-in into receptacle

The Base Unit must be switched off, and if it has a mains power supply, the adapter cable must be unplugged.

Slide the plug-in into its slot.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 2

Getting started

Universal connectors and adapters

When it is fully home, press against the screen-printed surface of the plug-in while tightening the the securing screws. The screenprinted surface of the plug-in must be flush with that of the receptacle.

Make sure that the two large captive screws of the plug-in are screwed fully home.

NOTE

UHD plug-ins use very powerful lasers : they must be connected exclusively to optical connectors equiped with zirconium ferules.

Using connectors equiped with metallic ferrules could damage the plug-in connector.

Removing a plug-in from a receptacle

The Base Unit must be switched off, and if it has a mains power supply, the adapter cable must be unplugged.

Completely unscrew (up to the stop) the two captive screws securing the plug-in.

Carefully slide the plug-in out of its slot.

Universal connectors and adapters

Fiber Optic plug-ins may come equipped with a universal connector and adapter selected at time of order.

Adapter types

JDSU offers 5 different adapters, all compatible with this connector, allowing the user to switch from one adapter to another according to which fiber type he intends to work with.

Adapter types supplied are : FC, SC, DIN, ST and LC.

User Manual 780000102/19 15

Chapter 2

Getting started

Universal connectors and adapters

FC Adapter (EUFCAD)

DIN Adapter (EUDINAD)

LC Adapter (EULCAD)

Fig. 9

PC or APC Connector

ST Adapter (EUSTAD)

SC Adapter (EUSCAD)

5 different types of adapters may be mounted on the universal connector

Switching adapter type

In order to switch from an adapter to another, proceed as shown.

Pull out in the direction of the arrow in order to release the adapter from the lug holes

To place an adapter, position the handle as shown in order to engage with the the lugs, push hard and pull the handle down

Fig. 10

Removing and refitting an adapter

Cleaning the universal connector

Remove the adapter in order to access the ferrule and clean it using a cotton swab.

16 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

This chapter describes the graphical user interface of the Base Unit used with the optical measurement plug-ins (OTDR, WDM, etc.).

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Display screen” on page 18

–

“Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)” on page 21

–

“Functions relating to display of a trace” on page 23

–

“Overlay trace function” on page 26

–

“Saving when the instrument is shut down” on page 29

User Manual 780000102/19 17

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Display screen

Display screen

The display screen is divided into a number of different zones. Starting from the top, these are:

– a status bar in which various icons indicate the current functions:

– a bar displaying a scaled-down representation of the trace, showing the zoom zone and the parameters of the measurement on display

(signature of the measurement).

– the main part of the screen, displaying a menu or the page of results.

– tabs enabling the user to switch from one function to another

(OTDR, WDM, power meter, etc.), as required.

At the right-hand side of the screen, softkeys give access to the various commands. Their action depends on the current function and configuration.

Fig. 11

Example of display of results (with OTDR plug-in)

Top status bar

The top status bar on the screen shows, on the right, current date and time, and in the form of icons:

– the type of power supply: mains or battery, and if the power supply is on battery the level of charge (see Battery management in chapter 2 from the Base Unit manual)

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Display screen

– if the Talkset option is present and the telephone is activated, the

– if a remote screen is selected, the icon more are working on the same Base Unit).

(or

– if transfer of data is in progress, the icon

– if a printing process is in progress, the icon

if two users or

– if a data saving is in progress, the icon

– if the Web Browser application is active, the icon

– if a USB key is connedcted onto the Platform, the icon

Mini-trace

The

File

menu and the

Results

page can include a scaled-down representation of the trace which may show the location of the zoom zone corresponding to the main display. The part of the trace shown in the main display is boxed on the mini-trace.

This mini-trace will only appear if the trace originated from an Base Unit.

Other Bellcore files read on this instrument do not contain the information needed to display it.

Signature of the measurement

A status bar repeats the parameters of the measurement, and in some cases:

– the position of the cursors

– a comment

– the name of the file when the result is recalled from a memory.

Main display zone

The central zone of the screen can display the configuration of the instrument or the measurement, the memory explorer of the Base Unit, the measurement results, etc. Refer to the chapter dealing with the measurement in progress.

Tabs

When the instrument performs several different functions (OTDR, WDM,

Power Meter, etc.), the various configuration or results pages are accessible from tabs. To change from one tab to another, the button selecting the page must be pressed. To example:

– on the Results page, to change from one tab to the other, press the

ESULTS

button

– on the measurement configuration page, to change from one tab to the other, press the

ETUP

button

User Manual 780000102/19 19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Display screen

– On the file configuration page, to change from one tab to the other, press the

ILE

button.

NOTE

There is a tab for each different type of measurement: OTDR SM,

OTDR MM, OSA, Power Meter... The tab of a function is displayed if and only if a plug-in corresponding to this type of measurement has been inserted in the instrument, or if a file of the type of this measurement is open. If two plug-ins of the same measurement type are present, then only one plug-in is "active", so only one tab will appear for this measurement. To change the active plug-in, go to the SYSTEM screen and select it there.

A small icon may appear in the left corner of each tab, according to the status of the corresponding module.

The icon signification is the following :

– No icon : the function is used in a read-only mode (no module), or the module has not been selected.

– Gray icon : the function has been selected but the corresponding module does not currently perform an acquisition.

– Green icon : the function has been selected and the corresponding module currently performs an acquisition.

Soft keys

The 7 softkeys at the side depend on the current configuration and the context.

Their use is symbolized by an icon.

Icons

shows that the action is immediate when the key is pressed.

 shows that the key gives access to a sub-menu.

 shows that the key will quit the sub-menu.



(green direction keys) shows that the function selected by the key will be controlled by the direction keys.

(green confirmation key) shows that the function selected will be controlled by the confirmation key.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)

Selection keys

The selection may be exclusive (only one choice possible) or non-exclusive (more than one option available at the same time):

This key offers two exclusive options. The change of function occurs immediately, the first time the key is pressed.

This key offers two non-exclusive options. Pressing the key repeatedly modifies the choice.

Color of the keys

When a selection key is associated with direction keys or the confirmation key:

– if the function is not selected, the key is dark blue.

– pressing the key once selects the function. The key turns lighter in color to show the user that the direction keys are assigned to it.

Pressing more times will modify the choice made using the key.

Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch

(options)

The external keyboard facilitates input of:

– alphanumerical configuration parameters

– comments in the File menu

– notes in the table of results

– editing characters

The mouse can be used instead of the direction keys to scroll through menus and make a selection.

Connect the keyboard and mouse to the USB connectors.

The external keyboard delivered with MTS/T-BERD 8000/6000/

6000A is a QWERTY keyboard.

Virtual control buttons bar

It is possible to emulate hard keys with Virtual Control buttons

To display these buttons, click once on the top of the screen in the status bar, at the same height than the date and time.

User Manual 780000102/19 21

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)

Fig. 12

Virtual control buttons bar

The virtual control buttons bar is displayed during a few seconds. You may click on any of these buttons to obtain exactly the same results than using the real buttons in the front panel of the Base Unit.

The virtual control buttons bar can not be displayed within desktop applications (see the User Manual of the Base Unit).

NOTE

This virtual control buttons bar is especially useful when the Base Unit screen is exported on a remote PC (see the User Manual of the Base

Unit).

Equivalence between external keyboard and

Base Unit

Although it is intended primarily to replace the Edit menu of the Base

Unit, the external keyboard can replace all the buttons and keys of the

Base Unit except the

button

– The menu keys to the right of the screen are replaced by the function keys

– The buttons below the screen are equivalent to

Ctrl +

a letter (see table below).

– The direction keys have the same function on the external keyboard and on the Base Unit.

Function on the Base Unit

SYSTEM

SET-UP

FILE

RESULTS

START/STOP

SCRIPT (Macro)

Menu keys 1 to 7 (from top to bottom)

External keyboard

Ctrl + Y

Ctrl + U

Ctrl + P

Ctrl + F

Ctrl + R

Ctrl + S

Ctrl + M



 F7

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Functions relating to display of a trace

Function on the Base Unit

AVE AND QUIT

XIT

)

UIT WITHOUT SAVING

BORT

)

External keyboard

Entrée/Enter

Escape/Echap.

1. The print key is not available on the MTS/T-BERD 6000, however the function is available on the Platform by pushing simultaneously left and right arrow keys.

Editing text using the external keyboard

To use the external keyboard to insert a name or identification in the setup menus, or a Note in the table of results:

– press

Enter

to go into the Edit menu

– type the text

– press

Enter

to leave the Edit menu.

Pressing the

Esc

key will close the Edit menu without saving the text.

Functions relating to display of a trace

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see example on

Figure 11 on page 18 .

Various functions common to many plug-ins (OTDR, OSA etc.) can be used to modify the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Event/

Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.). The role of the direction keys and the confirmation key will depend on the function chosen.

Display of the results on the trace

Each event (OTDR measurement) or channel (WDM measurement) detected is represented under the trace by a serial number.

The results of the measurements can be written on the trace.

Depending on the options chosen in the

ETUP

menu on

Result Screen

> Results On Trace

, it is possible to show on the trace, for an OTDR measurement:

– "No" results,

– or "All" the results (value and position)

– or only the markers showing the position of the events measured

User Manual 780000102/19 23

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Functions relating to display of a trace

When there is saturation for a reflective event (OTDR measurement), the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign >. This shows that the actual reflectance is greater than the value shown (for example, if

R >-29.5 dB is displayed, the reflectance could be -18 dB)

The reflectance of a ghost event (OTDR measurement) is displayed in brackets on the trace.

Cursors

The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or delete markers.

The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:

– in a solid line if the cursor is selected.

– in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

Positioning the cursor

When a trace is displayed, the key <Cursor A/Cursor B> can be used to select one or both cursors.

The direction keys

and move the selected cursor(s) along the trace.

Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys

or It will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

When the cursor function is selected, the keys

and move the trace vertically.

Selection of the type of cursor

(OSA)

Two types of cursors can be defined:

Cursor on X: only a vertical bar is present.

Cursor on X and Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The intersection between these two bars is placed on the trace.

To display the type of cursor selected, click on

Advanced

. Then select the key

CursorX/CursorY

to modify the current choice. Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against

Cursor Y

24 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Functions relating to display of a trace

Zoom and Shift functions

Zoom function

The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail.

In association with Event (OTDR) or Channel (WDM) it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or channels.

The zoom is centred on the cursor selected. If the two cursors A and B are selected, the zoom is centred midway between the two cursors.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is represented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top lefthand corner of the screen.

To define a zoom on the trace:

– select cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined

– on the

Shift/Zoom

key, select the

Zoom

function.

– use the





key to increase or reduce the zoom factor.

Zooming on the different events in succession (OTDR)

– Zoom on one of the events detected as shown above.

– On the

Trace/Event

key, select the

Event

function

– Use the and

 keys to move the zoom on to the successive events.

Zooming on the different channels in succession (OSA)

– Zoom on one of the channels as shown above.

– On the

Trace/Channel

key, select the

Channel

function

Use the and

 keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels.

Shift function

The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the direction keys.

The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.

To use this function:

– Select the zoom factor as described above.

– Choose cursor and cursor position.

User Manual 780000102/19 25

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Overlay trace function

– On the

Zoom/Shift

key, select

Shift

– Use the direction keys to shift the trace in the desired direction.

NOTE

For a Chromatic Dispersion curve, click on

Config

in order to display the zoom and shift functions.

Zoom Auto (OTDR)

The

Zoom Auto

key alows to go to an optimized display of the trace.

Full scale (OSA /

PMD / AP)

To display the entire trace, with no zoom or displacement:

– either press the

Full Scale

key

– or, with

Trace

selected on the

Trace/Event

key, press the button.

Overlay trace function

This very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at once:

– either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same cable,

– or to observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber.

– or to compare both curves get for each way of propagation in the o/

Back mode.

For this purpose, the Base Unit possesses an overlay memory which can store:

– the current trace, for comparison with further traces to be acquired subsequently,

– or reference traces previously saved on floppy disk or CD-ROM or in the internal memory, for comparison with the current trace,

– or traces of different wavelengths for comparative purposes

(OTDR).

26 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Overlay trace function

Fig. 13

Example of overlaid traces

Overlaying several traces stored in memory

To display up to 8 traces from the memory, deleting the current trace or traces already loaded:

Press the

ILE

button.

On the

Menu/Explorer

key, select

Explorer

Select the files of the traces for display (see

"Multiple selection of files" page 235

Press the

Load

key .

Press View trace(s) or

Load traces + config

: as the traces are loaded, they cease to be highlighted in the list of files.

When loading is complete, the

Results

screen appears: the first trace selected is the active trace, the other traces being overlaid.

Display of traces in overlay

– The traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).

– Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen.

– The OTDR markers are referenced on the active trace by the symbol , and on the other traces by vertical dashes.

User Manual 780000102/19 27

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Overlay trace function

Adding traces in overlay

With OTDR traces

With one or more traces already displayed, to add further traces to the display (the number of traces displayed cannot exceed 8):

– Click on the key Set/Reset Ref. or Set/Reset All Ref. to define the selected trace or all traces displayed as reference trace(s) (see

"Reference Trace function" page 71 )..

– Press the

ILE

button, and in the Explorer menu, select the files of

the traces to be added (see "Multiple selection of files" page 235 ).

– Press the

Load

key

– Press the

View Trace(s)

Load trace + config

key: as the traces are loaded, they cease to be highlighted in the list of files.

– When loading is complete, the new traces are displayed in overlay with those that were already there.

NOTE

If the number of files selected exceeds the display capacity, a message gives warning that loading will be incomplete: only the trace or traces selected first will be displayed, up to the permitted limit of 8 traces.

Overlaying the current trace (with

OSA traces)

To copy the current trace into the overlay memory, proceed as follows:

– On the

ESULTS

page

, press the

Advanced

key, then

Overlay

, then

Set New Trace

The current trace is copied into the overlay memory: represented in a different color, it is automatically offset with respect to the new trace.

– A new acquisition can then be started.

NOTE

In the case of Multi-trace display with multiple wavelength acquisition: when the

TART

key is pressed, all the traces displayed are deleted to leave room for the new acquisitions.

Swapping overlay traces

Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid traces. To make measurements on a trace in overlay, it must first be swapped with the active trace. To do this, press the

Trace

key, then the

and keys, as many times as necessary.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Saving when the instrument is shut down

Changing the traces position

(OSA)

Once a trace is displayed in overlay, the traces can be adjusted according to the Y axis:

–

Y Reset

: all traces are on the the same level at the intersection with the active cursor.

–

Y Shift

: Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other.

–

Y Exact

: the traces displayed are on the same position according to their injection level.

Trace resulting from the difference between two traces (OSA)

It is possible to obtain the trace corresponding to the point-by-point difference between the current trace and the trace in overlay (if only two traces are displayed simultaneously).

To do this, press the

2 Traces Diff.

key. The screen will then display the two traces in overlay and the trace resulting from the "Difference".

Removing a trace

Removing the current trace in overlay

It is possible to remove a trace displayed. To do this, first select it (see previous paragraph), then press

Remove Current Trace

Removing all the the traces in overlay

To remove all the traces except the current trace, press the key

Remove

Other Traces

Quitting the overlay menu

To quit the overlay menu, press the

Exit

key.

Saving when the instrument is shut down

When the instrument is switched off, all the parameters and all the traces are saved, and will all be recalled at the next start-up.

User Manual 780000102/19 29

Chapter 3

Graphical User Interface

Saving when the instrument is shut down

30 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Pressing the

TART

TOP

key is all that is needed to start or stop a measurement. However, it is necessary to configure the measurement and the type of results desired.

This chapter describes the different stages in a reflectometry measurement made using an OTDR plug-in and the OTDR function of a 5083CD plug-in.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Selecting the function” on page 32

–

“Configuring the reflectometry test” on page 32

–

“Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator” on page 43

–

“Acquisition in Real Time mode” on page 45

–

“Acquisition in Fault Locator mode” on page 47

–

“Acquisition in Quick Link Test mode” on page 49

–

“Acquisition in Expert mode” on page 51

–

“Results page in Fault Locator mode” on page 53

–

“Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode” on page 55

–

“Advanced functions in Expert mode” on page 61

–

“Reference Trace function” on page 71

–

“File Management” on page 73

User Manual 780000102/19 31

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Selecting the function

Selecting the function

Press the

YSTEM

button. If the instrument is equipped with several plugins or if the sole module performs several functions:

– use the direction keys and to select the function: the icon under the mouse pointer is surrounded with a green frame.

– select the function by pressing : the icon turns orangy-yellow.

In the case a Singlemode/Multimode SRL Module is used, two icons can be selected on the System Page: multimode use.

for singlemode use or for

Fig. 14

Example of S

YSTEM

Page with OTDR SRL Module

Configuring the reflectometry test

To call up the test configuration window, press the

ETUP

button.

Dialog boxes on one and the same screen enable selection of measurement parameters, and display of results and fiber parameters.

1.if an OTDR module is installed

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

Fig. 15

OTDR SETUP screen

In these windows, the parameter selected is in video inverse. Select this parameter by means of the direction keys and .

The available choices then appear on the screen; they depend on the function selected. Make the choice by means of the direction keys

Acquisition parameters

You can choose the following acquisition parameters, whatever the type of measurement displayed on the trace.

Those measurement parameters are only linked to the next acquisition.

If the acquisition parameters are not accessible, check that the OTDR function has really been selected (see

"Selecting the function" on page

–

Mode

Choose the mode of detection of events:

- Expert: the acquisition parameters are accessible by the user. This mode can be configured either automatically or manually by the user (select Auto or

Manual in the Acquisition line - see page 34 )

User Manual 780000102/19 33

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

- Quick Link Test:the MTS/T-BERD 8000 starts an acquisition with an automatic configuration making the best compromise for Pulse/Range/Resolution. When acquisition is complete, a measurement is made and the results are displayed.

- Fault Locator the Fault locator mode allows to detect the end of fiber distance from the origin and, by consequence,

to detect a possible break of this fibre (see "Principle of the Fault Locator mode" on page 47 ). It also

allows to display the total loss.

NOTE

The mode selected is always displayed on the upper banner of the screen when the OTDR module is selected in the System page.

–

Laser

The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength selected (for multiple-wavelength modules): the possible values depend on the modules.



All: the acquisition will be carried out on all available wavelengths.

According to the module you are using, the laser source mode is selectable using the softkey LASER SOURCE at the bottom of the OTDR setup screen, or selecting the icon Source on the System page (for more details about this mode, see

Chapter 5 “Source option of the OTDR

Modules’ on page 75

The Laser Source mode is not available with the UHD and SR(e) modules.

When the Laser Source key is available on the Setup screen, press the key and select the laser wavelength.

–

Acquisition

Select the kind of acquisition to be performed:

This parameter is only available in Expert mode

Manual

Auto

The acquisition parameters Pulse / Range / Resolu-

tion

can be set by user.

The acquisition parameters Pulse / Range / Resolu-

tion

are defined by default and cannot be modified

The Measurement time will be set to Auto, but can be modified.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

Pulse

This depends on the type of OTDR module.



This parameter is exclusively configurable in Expert mode> Manual.

In the case of a multi wavelength acquisition:

– you can define a pulse for each wavelength:

select each wavelength in the Laser line and define a pulse

Once all lasers are configrued, go back to the pulse line and select Multi.

– you can define a pulse for all lasers:

select All on the Laser line

select a pulse, which will be comon to all lasers

See "Typical specifications of OTDR plug-ins" on page 276 .

–

Range

This depends on the type of OTDR module. The possible range depends on the pulse length selected.

This range is given for each pulse length in the paragraph "Ranges" on page 279 . This parameter is exclusively configurable in Expert mode> Manual.

– The Auto parameter allows to detect automatically the range.

In Auto mode, the range is selected as a function of the end of the fiber.

–

Resolution

From 4 cm to 160 m according to module.



No calibration of the measurement. The choice offered depends on the range and pulse selected.



In Auto mode, resolution is selected automatically according to the last two parameters above.

High Resolution: the highest resolution is applied

High Dynamic: the highest dynamic is applied

This parameter is exclusively configurable in Expert mode>

Manual

– Acquisition time

- Real time: the MTS/T-BERD 8000 performs up to ten acquisitions per second and displays the resulting trace in real time together with an indicator of the state of the connection. This mode makes it possible to analyze a fiber quickly without any memory effect, and thus to check the establishment and quality of the connections.

User Manual 780000102/19 35

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

NOTE

Whatever is the acquisition mode selected, an acquisition in real time mode can be launched maintaining the

TART

TOP

button pushed for about 2 seconds.

- Manual:

- Predefined Select one of the acquisition time predefined: 10 seconds / 20 seconds / 30 seconds / 1 minute / 2 minutes / 3 minutes.

- Auto

Enter the acquisition time wished (from 5 s. to 5 minutes max).

This mode is only available in Expert Mode, when

Auto

configuration is selected.

– Short Acquisition

This parameter allows to launch a short acquisition before the standard one. It is available in Expert mode only.

With Short Acq.

: a first short acquisition is performed, with a range of 5 km and a short pulse width, in order to minimize the Dead zone value, before the standard one, which will maximize the dynamic value..

Without Short Acq.

: the standard acquisition is directly launched .

Test Auto

The

Test Auto

key imposes the following parameters:

– Acquisition parameters:

Laser: All

Acquisition: Auto

Acquisition time: Auto

–

Saving parameters (see Chapter 14 “File management’ on page

217 ):

File naming:



Fiber[Cable] [Cable_Id][Fiber_Num] _[Lambda][direction]

Increment Fiber number: Yes

Auto Store: yes

Factory default settings

The

Factory Defaults

key imposes the parameters for acquisition, measurement and display of results defined as default settings in factory.

36 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

Measurements parameters

You can select the following measurement parameters, in the

Measurements

field.

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

Detection

Choice of events to be detected:

NOTE

The two following parameters are not available in Fault Locator mode.

–

Otdr Connector test

: this parameter allows to choose if a test of the connector must be performed when acquisition is launched.

: the OTDR connector is not tested



Yes & Continue

: the OTDR connector is tested, and even if the state is not good, the acquisition continues.

Yes & Abort

: the OTDR connector is tested, and if the state is bad, the acquisition stops.

This parameter cannot be applied for the current trace open. If this parameter must be configured to Yes, a new acquisition must be launched.

–

Otdr Connector Measurement

: this parameter allows to choose if a measurement of the start connector must be performed during the acquisition.

: in the results table, the first line corresponds to the first event detected.



Yes

: in the results, the first result correpond to the start connector measurement, at 0 meter (estimated value).

This parameter can be applied for the current trace open. If this parameter is modified for the current trace open, then the results will automatically be modified according to the configuration.

Splice

(Expert mode only):

All

: all splices will be detected



None

: no splice will be detected

 or choose the threshold from which splices will be detected between

User Manual 780000102/19 37

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

0.01 dB and 1.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB.



Factory default value: Auto.

–

Reflectance

(Expert mode only):

All: all reflections will be detected



None: no reflection will be detected

 or choose the threshold from which reflections will be detected between -98 and -11 in steps of 1 dB.



Factory default value: All.

NOTE

If no result is displayed after a measurement, make sure that the parameter

All

is selected for the detection of splices and reflections.

–

Ghost

(Expert mode only):

Choice (Yes / No / No Analysis) of whether information relating to ghosts is to be displayed. If ghosts are displayed, the reflection icon in the table of results appears dotted and the reflection value is displayed in brackets on the trace, for example «(R:-50 dB)».

Factory default value: No.

NOTE

Ghosts are detected only during an automatic measurement.

–

Fiber end

–

Auto

(recommended) option in which the MTS/T-BERD 8000 automatically detects the end of a fiber.

– 3 to 20 dB (in steps of 1 dB): threshold of detection of end of fiber.

Factory default value:

Auto

– Event After Fiber End

(Expert mode only):

If yes, the events after the end of the link are detected.

Factory default value: No.

–

Total Loss

(Expert mode only)

–

Before evt

: for a given line on table, the total loss result does not include the splice/connector loss of the corresponding line

–

After evt

: on the table, for a given line, the total loss measurement on the table does include the splice/connector loss of the corresponding line.

–

Bend

: Select the bend value (in dB), using the direction keys and or the numeric keypad.

38 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

With any dual or triple-wavelength measurement module, the user will have access to the macro bend detection function in the test setup. Each event of the selected wavelengths will then be compared.

Factory default value: Auto

Index of refraction

Choice of group refraction index of the whole fiber.

– User

– Either: define for each wavelength (1310 SM, 1360-1510 SM,

1550 SM, 1625 SM) a refraction index of 1.30000 to 1.69999.

The selection of an index alters the value of the section AB

(actual distance between cursors A and B).

NOTE

With the CWDM Module, the selection is as follows:

– For lasers 1271, 1291, 1311, 1331 and 1351, select the line 1310

SM.

– For lasers 1371 to 1511, select the line 1360 - 1510 SM

– For lasers 1531, 1551 and 1571, select the line 1550 SM

– For lasers 1591 and 1611, select the line 1625 SM.

– or, if the actual distance between the cursors A and B is known, enter its value under Section AB to establish the index of the fiber. Selection of this distance causes the display of the indices.

The extreme distance values are given by the index values

(1.30000 à 1.70000).

– Predefined index

– It is possible to choose one of the predefined values given for certain cables. The corresponding indices given in the table below are repeated on the screen.

Wavelength (nm) 1310 SM

ATT SM

Corning SMF-28

Corning SMF-DS

Corning SMF-LS

Corning-LEAF

1.46600

1.46750

1.47180

1.47100

1.46890

1475 1480 1510 1550 1625 SM

1.46700

1.46810

1.47110

1.47000

1.46840

User Manual 780000102/19 39

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

Wavelength (nm) 1310 SM

Fitel Furukawa

Lucent Truewave

SpecTran SM

Litespec

1.47000

1.47380

1.46750

1.46600

Fig. 16

1475 1480 1510 1550 1625 SM

1.47000

1.47320

1.46810

1.46700

Predefined index values (Single Mode)

Wavelength (nm)

Corning 62.5

Corning 50

SpecTran 62.5

Generic 50

Generic 62.5

Fig. 17

850 MM

1.50140

1.48970

1.49600

1.49000

Predefined index values (Multi Mode)

1300 MM

1.49660

1.48560

1.49100

1.48600

1.48700

Scatter coefficient

(not available in Fault Locator mode)

– User Selects for each wavelength, the backscatter coefficient of

-99 dB to -50 dB by increments of 0.1dB. Modification of the backscatter coefficient K changes the measurements of reflectance and ORL.

With the CWDM Module, the selection is as follows:

- For lasers 1271, 1291, 1311, 1331 and 1351, select the line 1310 SM

- For lasers 1371 to 1511, select the line 1360 - 1510 SM

- For lasers 1531, 1551 and 1571, select the line 1550 SM

- For lasers 1591 and 1611, select the line 1625 SM.

– Auto Backscatter coefficients are selected automatically for each wavelength.

The default values are given in the paragraph

"Reflectance" on page 3

Launch cable End / Receive Cable Start

NOTE

The parameter "Receive Cable Start" is not available in Fault Locator mode.

– No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board of the plug-in.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

OTDR

– Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated from the table. Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.

The parameter Launch Cable Start in Fault Locator mode, cannot be configured according to an event number.

– Distance Use the

Edit Number

key to enter the distance from the begining of the Launch cable until its end, and / or from the end of the Receive Cable until its start (= the

total length of the cable). See Figure 18 on page 41

Or affect the active cursor value, using the

Set Cursor

Distance.

Launch Cable Receive Cable

Fiber Under Test

Distance of the launch cable

Launch

Cable end

Receive

Cable start

Distance of the receive cable

Fig. 18

Launch Cable / Receive Cable

Defining the Launch Cable End parameter with an event number or a distance will automatically activate the corresponding parameter Include

Link End connector

. This parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connector loss of the launch cable at end

Defining the Receive Cable Start parameter with an event number or a distance, will automatically activate the corresponding parameter

Include Link Start connector

. This parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connector loss of the receive cable at start

If those parameters are set to No, the budget only displays the connector loss of the fiber under test.

Factory default value: No.

User Manual 780000102/19 41

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Configuring the reflectometry test

Result screen

Those parameters are valid for all the traces present on the screen.

–

Alarms > Threshold

None: The alarm function is not active.

Fail: This menu lists possible major alarm thresholds that the user could select. If results are above those thresholds, they will be highlighted in red in the table of results, and the icon

will appear at the top right of the screen.

Thresholds are can be configured for: Splice / Connector /

Reflectance / Slope / Fiber Length Min and Max / Total Loss

Min and Max / ORL.

Warning: This menu lists possible minor alarm thresholds that the user could select. If results are between those thresholds and the "fail" thresholds, they will be highlighted in yellow in the table of results, and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen.

Thresholds can be set for: Splice / Connector / Reflectance.

If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red or yellow), results are displayed in green in the table and the icon will be .Notes

See "Table notes" on page 64

No: no display of notes

Notes: display of notes entered by the user

Uncertainty: display of indicators of the level of confidence in the measurement result.

Factory default value: No

–

Results on trace

No: the trace alone.

All: the trace with results and markers.

Graphics only: the trace with markers only.

Factory default value: All.

If «All» or «Graphics only» is selected, the reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable

(if the Launch Cable is defined in the

ETUP

menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .

–

Grid

if Yes, the grid is present on the result screen



Factory default value: No.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator

–

Unit

Units of the distances displayed: km, kfeet, miles, metre, feet.

–

Colors (RGB)

When overlaying several traces (see

"Overlay trace function" on page 26

), you can change each trace color.

- Active curve: allows to change the active curve color

- Curve 1 to 8: allows to change the selected curve color (from trace 1 to 8)

NOTE

To get the default color for all traces, click on

Colors Default

When you change the trace color, the new color is displayed at the right side of its value.

Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator

Traffic

Detection

Traffic on the fiber under test can be detected and reported if the function

TD (Traffic Detection) has been selected on the System page .

If the fiber connected to the OTDR module is active, a message indicating a signal in the fiber under test is displayed.

Push any key to continue.

Press the

TART

TOP

key to begin the measurement. A message indicates there is traffic on the fiber and asks you if you wish to continue or not:

– If you click on

, the measurement is not launched.

– If you click on

, the measurement is performed, despite the traffic.

NOTE

If the measurement is validated despite the traffic (key

), the next measurement will be automatically performed, even if traffic is still detected on fiber.

If the measurement is cancelled (key

), and the

TART

TOP

pushed another time, the box asking if you wish to continue or not is displayed.

User Manual 780000102/19 43

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator

If the Traffic Detection function is not selected on the System page, then the message Signal Detected on fiber under test is displayed, but the acquisition is although performed once any key is pressed (no warning message asking you if the measurement must be performed or not is displayed).

Connection

Quality indicator

An indicator of the state of the connection (Good / Bad) is given at the beginning of an acquisition, whatever is the acquisition mode selected.

The connection quality indicator gives the following information:

State Connection

Good The connection is OK

Bad Possible causes of a bad result:

- There are several connectors close to the external connector of the MTS/T-BERD 8000.

- One of the connectors is dirty or badly connected. Replace the launch cable, make the connection again properly or clean the connector of the OTDR or of the jumper.

- No fiber is connected.

If the state of the connection is bad, it is still possible to carry out a measurement, but the results will not be very reliable.

NOTE

If the connection is bad, check and clean the connector / jumpers (see

“Cleaning the universal connector” on page 16

Battery saver

When running on battery, if no acquisition has been performed for two minutes, the power supply of the module is cut off to save the battery.

Client specific option: Fiber identification box (TR management for

Verizon - MTS/T-BERD 6000 only)

The TR box allows to automatically identify the number of the end of fiber.

If this number is not the same as the fiber detected, the user will be advised of this incoherence

44 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Real Time mode

Acquisition in Real Time mode

Principle of

Real Time mode

Acquisition in real time must not be used if a precise measurement is required because of the high noise level, but it is sufficient for rapid optimization of a connection and for observing a fiber in process of utilization.

Performing an acquisition in

Real Time mode

To carry out an acquisition in real time, after selection of the requisite acquisition parameters (see

"Acquisition parameters" on page 33 ):

– Hold the

TART

key down for about two seconds, to launch the acquisition in real time, whatever is the Acquisition mode selected in the Setup menu.

– or choose the Real time mode of acquisition in the

ETUP

menu, then press the

TART

TOP

key.

The red Testing indicator will go on to show that real time acquisition is in progress. The trace acquired is displayed in real time. An indicator of the state of the connection (

Good/Bad

) is displayed below the trace.

NOTE

If the connection is bad, check and clean the connector / jumpers.

Real time display

Once

TART

TOP

key is pressed, the acquisition in real time is launched.

User Manual 780000102/19 45

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Real Time mode

Fig. 19

Example of acquisition in real time

During an acquisition in real time, you can modify the acquisition parameters without returning to the

ETUP

menu. To do this, press the

Acquisition Param

key: you can then use display keys to scroll through the possible values of the various acquisition parameters.

In real time mode, only measurements relating to the cursors are possible, but as soon as acquisition stops, automatic measurement is possible.

During a real time acquisition, you can reach the end of the fiber under test at any time, using the Zoom to End key.

The real time mode allows to make Loss, ORL or Reflectance measurement using the A & B cursors and the key None / Loss / ORL / Reflect.:

Position A & B cursors on the trace

Click as many times as necessary to get the Loss / ORL / Reflectance measurement between A & B cursors

The result is displayed under the trace.

46 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Fault Locator mode

Fig. 20

Example of loss measurement between A & B cursors

To terminate or interrupt an acquisition in real time mode, press the

TART

TOP

key.

Multiwavelength acquisition

If the plug-in possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the wavelengths:

– In the

ETUP

select

All

menu, on the Laser line, choose several lasers or

– Start the acquisition by pressing the

TART

TOP

button.

– Once the acquisition for the first wavelength is finished or to stop it manually, click on Stop Wavelength to stop the measurement for this wavelength and automatically start the measurement for the following one..

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as

traces in overlay (see .

“Overlay trace function” on page 26 ).

Acquisition in Fault Locator mode

Principle of the

Fault Locator mode

The Fault locator mode is used to detect the distance of the end of fiber from its origin. Consequently, il allows to detect a possible break of the fiber. It also allows to calculate the Total Loss.

User Manual 780000102/19 47

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Fault Locator mode

Performing an acquisition in

Fault Locator mode

Push the

ETUP

button

In the Acquisition parameters:

–

Select Fault Locator in the line Mode (see "Configuring the reflectometry test" on page 32 )

Configure the other acquistion parameters (see .

“Acquisition parameters” on page 33

) or click on Test auto to configure automatically the acquisition once the mode is selected or click on Factory Default to set the parameters defined in factory for this mode.

Push the

TART

TOP

button.

The test configuration starts automatically.

A baragraph indicates the quality of the connection (see "Connection Quality indicator" on page 44 )

Then, the elapsed averaging time and the number of averages calculated are displayed.

The acquisition can be stopped at any time pushing

TART

TOP

button.

Display of the acquisition mode selected

Fig. 21

Acquisition in Fault Locator mode

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Quick Link Test mode

Multi-wavelength acquisition

If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the wavelengths:

– in the

ETUP

menu, check in Laser line, that selected or select All

several lasers are

– Start the acquisition by pressing the

TART

TOP

button.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as traces in overlay (see

“Overlay trace function” on page 26

Acquisition in Quick Link Test mode

Principle of the

Quick Link Test mode

The fastest way of detecting faults in your optical fiber is to use automatic acquisition mode. The MTS/T-BERD 8000 then uses the acquisition parameters (pulse width, range and resolution, and acquisition time) best suited to the fiber to be tested.

NOTE

In Quick Link Test mode, since all the parameters have been reconfigured, overlay and marker locking are not possible during acquisition.

Performing an acquisition in

Quick Link Test mode

Press the

ETUP

button, then:

On the

Mode

line, select

Quick Link Test

On the

Laser

line, select the wavelength of the laser (if the MTS/T-

BERD 8000 uses a dual-wavelength plug-in) or select All.

Select the Measurement and Results Screen parameters wished.

You can automatically configure the Quick Link Test mode by pressing Test Auto key once the mode is selected, or configure it according to the parameters set in Factory by clicking on the

Factory Default

key.

Acquisition phases in Quick Link Test mode

When the

TART

TOP

key is pressed, an automatic configuration procedure selects the optimum parameters, after which acquisition is carried out in four phases:

User Manual 780000102/19 49

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Quick Link Test mode

– Phase 1: Choice of the best range to display the whole of the fiber under test.

– Phase 2: Choice of the ideal pulse width and of the acquisition time to qualify the fiber accurately; for example the one that gives the best resolution for a given dynamic.

–

Phase 3: Display of the quality of the connection (see "Connection

Quality indicator" on page 44 )

– Phase 4: The elapsed averaging time and the number of averages calculated are displayed. When the duration of acquisition has elapsed, the automatic measurement is carried out.

NOTE

The acquisition can be stopped at any moment by pressing the

TART

TOP

key. Then an automatic measurement is performed.

Elapsed acquisition time

Number of averages calculated

Elapsed time

Remaining acquisition time

Total acquisition time

Fig. 22

Example of automatic acquisition

At the end of Auto acquisition, the parameters are automatically updated in the Acquisition menu. Moreover, a beep is emitted in case of alarm.

Auto acquisition mode deactivates the

Set Event

function (see

"Memorization of the position of events" on page 70 ): the measurement is

then re-initialized.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Expert mode

Multi-wavelength acquisition

If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the wavelengths:

– in the

ETUP

menu, check in Laser line, that selected or select All

several lasers are

– Start the acquisition by pressing the

TART

TOP

button.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as traces in overlay (see

“Overlay trace function” on page 26

Acquisition in Expert mode

In this mode, the MTS/T-BERD 8000 carries out a number of averagings defined as a function of the maximum acquisition time specified in the

Acquisition menu, and then terminates the acquisition. The acquisition is carried out with the parameters previously selected in the Acquisition menu. It may be stopped at any time using the

TART

TOP

key.

Configuring the acquisition

To configure a manual acquisition of the fiber under test, follow the procedure described below, in the

ETUP

menu (see "Acquisition parameters" on page 33 ):

On the

Mode

line, select

Expert

Select the wavelength on the

Laser

line.

Select Manual or Auto on the line Acquisition.

If Manual has been previously selected, on the

Pulse

line, select the required pulse length from the values proposed.

If Manual has been previously selected, select the required

Range

from the values proposed.

If Manual has been previously selected, select the

Resolution

On the

Acquisition Time

line, select the duration of acquisition.

If you wish, select Short Acquisition if a first acquisition, on a range of 5 km and a small pulse width must be performed before the standard acquisition (see

“Short Acquisition” on page 36

User Manual 780000102/19 51

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Acquisition in Expert mode

Performing an acquisition in

Expert mode

Press the

TART

TOP

key to start the acquisition.

The red indicator goes on to show that the MTS/T-BERD 8000 is in process of acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.

The quality of the connection is displayed for a few seconds (see

"Connection Quality indicator" on page 44

) then a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

Elapsed acquisition time

Number of averages calculated

Elapsed time

Remaining acquisition time

Total acquisition time

Fig. 23

Example of acquisition in Expert mode

If the parameter Short Acquisition has been defined to Yes in the Setup screen (see

“Short Acquisition” on page 36

), two acquisition will be performed (if one laser is selected).

At the end of the acquisition, the trace is displayed and an automatic measurement is started. If one short acquisition has been configureed, then 2 traces will be displayed at the end of acquisition.

NOTE

To stop the acquisition, the

TART

TOP

key may be pressed at any time. Then an automatic measurement is carried out, but some events cannot be detected (a manual measurement must then be made).

Multi-wavelength acquisition

If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the wavelengths:

– in the

ETUP

menu, check in Laser line, that several lasers are selected or select All

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Results page in Fault Locator mode

– Start the acquisition by pressing the

TART

TOP

button.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as

traces in overlay (see .

“Overlay trace function” on page 26 ).

Results page in Fault Locator mode

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page.

Once the test is completed, the instrument measures the end of fiber distance and display it with the unit chosen. The Total Loss is also displayed.

Fig. 24

Fault Location

A number of different functions can modify the display of the trace

– Cursor A / Cursor B (see

“Cursors” on page 24

)

– Zoom/Shift (see

“Zoom and Shift functions” on page 25 )

–

Table/Summary (see "Table / Summary function" on page 54

)

User Manual 780000102/19 53

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Results page in Fault Locator mode

NOTE

If a problem occurs during acquisition, two types of message can be displayed on screen:

- Fiber End not found: fiber length is too long for the OTDR used etc.

- No fiber connected

Under the trace, in the blue line, are displayed:

– the ORL value of the link

– the Launch Cable length (if defined)

The

Cursor

and

Zoom

keys are available.

Table /

Summary function

To display a summary of the results for 2 traces or more in overlay, select

Summary

with the Table/Summary key.

Mode of acquisition selected

Fig. 25

Fault Locator: Summary page

An additional window is displayed, with issue highlighted in case of problem, including bend.

In Summary mode, there is neither access to other functions because the Summary function analyzes two traces at the same time. Go back to the Table function to have access to these functions.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

Trace display functions

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results

page: see example Figure 27 on page 56

A number of different functions can modify the display of the trace

(Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Trace/Event, Trace/Table/Summary, Full Scale,

etc.). See page 23

See "Overlaying several traces stored in memory" on page 27

for overlay of traces.

Traces display in double acquisition mode

When a double acquisition has been performed, i.e. a short acquisition

preceeding a standard one (see “Short Acquisition” on page 36 ), two

traces are displayed in the same window.

End of the short acquisition (in blue) whereas the standard one continues

(in green)

Fig. 26

Traces display in double acquisition mode

The short trace is the one resulting from the short acquisition and stops while the standard one continues until the end of measurement.

Display of events on trace

Each event detected is referenced under the trace by a serial number.

NOTE

In Expert mode

, to display the results on the trace, make sure that the option selected in

Results on Trace

All

in the menu

ETUP

User Manual 780000102/19 55

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

NOTE

At the end of an acquisition, a beep is emitted in case of alarm.

The reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable (if the Launch Cable is defined in the

ETUP

menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber ..

In expert mode only, the results of the measurements of attenuation, reflectance and slope can be marked on the trace.

Depending on the choice made in the

ETUP

menu, on

Result Screen

> Results on Trace

, it is possible to show on the trace:

– "No" results,

– "All" results (value and position)

– or only the markers showing the position of the events measured

When there is saturation for a reflective event, the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign >.

This shows that the actual reflectance is greater than the value shown

(for example, if R >-29,5 dB is displayed, the reflectance could be -

18 dB)

The reflectance of a ghost event is displayed in brackets on the trace.

Fig. 27

Example of trace (in Expert mode)

User Manual 780000102/19

In Quick Link

Test mode, this

2 keys are not available

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

Trace/Event functions

The

Trace

function is useful in a multi-trace display, as the direction keys can then be used to select the active trace, which turns green

(see

"Overlay trace function" on page 26

The

Event

function of the MTS/T-BERD 8000 enables the cursor to be moved on to the faults that have been measured and the results of which are displayed on the screen.

After selecting the

Event

function on the

Trace/Event

key, pressing the keys , , or once will move the cursor from one event to the next. This function, in association with

Zoom

and

Cursor

, enables rapid analysis of the fiber.

NOTE

While moving from one event to another, the value of the zoom is conserved (unless this is impossible).

Criteria for display of an event

An event will be displayed if its attenuation or its reflectance exceeds the corresponding threshold selected in the

ETUP

menu (see "Acquisition parameters" on page 33

). Both results for an event will be displayed if they can be calculated. The following table gives some examples of detection of events for different threshold values.

E.g.

Value of the thresholds

Attenuat.(dB)

Reflect. (dB)

- 15

---

The MTS/T-BERD 8000 displays a value if the attenuation or the reflectance has one of the following values

Attenuation

> 1 dB

> 6 dB

Example: a value will be displayed at -43 dB.

Example: a value will be displayed at -14 dB but not at -20 dB.

Reflectance

> - 60 dB

>- 15 dB

The reflectance of an event is always measured except when the event causes a saturated Fresnel peak or if it is drowned out by noise. In this case, the MTS/T-BERD 8000 displays

to show that the actual reflectance exceeds the value displayed.

For example, to detect all the splices on a fiber having attenuation greater than 0.05 dB, select the different thresholds of the events to be detected in the menu called by the

ETUP

key, in the

Measurements >

Detection

window.

User Manual 780000102/19 57

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

Relative measurement

Relative measurements, using the 2 point method, can be carried out by means of the Event function in coordination with the two cursors. For example, you can analyze the total loss on a link with launch cable:

Place one of the cursors at the end of the launch cable.

Select the other cursor.

Use the Set Event function. The measurements displayed give the actual distance from the start of the link and the attenuation of the link plus the attenuation of the connection.

Table of results

NOTE

In Expert mode

, to display all the events, make sure that the detection threshold selection in the

ETUP

menu is

All

Two types of tables of results are possible with the MTS/T-BERD 8000:

– A table with a line displayed under the trace and giving the type and characteristics of the event nearest to the cursor.

– A table giving the type and the characteristics of all the events detected during the automatic measurements: the 8 lines displayed correspond to the 8 events nearest to the cursor. The line corresponding to the event nearest to the cursor is highlighted. This highlighting moves if the cursor is moved.

At the top of the table, a line shows the generic parameters of the fiber: numbers of events present, total ORL of the link, marker locking icon and launch cable length (if selected).

Change of table

To obtain the 8-line table, select the Table function on the

Trace/Table/

Summary

key. To return to display of a single line in the table, select the

Trace

function.

To scroll through the table, if it contains more than 8 lines:

– either select the

Cursors

function, and move the selected cursor along the trace using the keys and

– or select the

Event

function, and move the cursor through the table, using the keys and .

58 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

Fig. 28

Example of table of results

Information provided for each event detected

Each event is referenced under the trace by a serial number which is repeated in the first column of the table. The table then shows:

– an icon symbolizing the type of the event:



Measurement of the Otdr connector (see page 37 )

Non-reflecting attenuation (e.g. splice).



Event with reflection (e.g. connector).



Ghost reflection.



Slope of the fiber (when no fault follows the slope).



End of fiber



ORL measurement



Event marker when a measurement cannot be carried out. If the event to be added is too close to an existing event, the icon appears on the trace and the table, but no measurement is carried out: to obtain the results for this event, a manual measurement is necessary.

User Manual 780000102/19 59

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Result page in Expert and Quick Link test mode

End of launch cable: the attenuation and distances are measured on the basis of the corresponding marker.

– The distance of the event from the beginning of the fiber, in metres

(or kfeet or miles).

– The attenuation due to the event, in dB.

– The reflectance of the event, in dB (or the ORL result if an ORL measurement has been carried out).

– The slope before the event, in dB/km (dB/kft) if it can be measured.

– The length of the section, that is to say the distance between the marker of the event and the previous marker.

– The total attenuation of the fiber (total dB loss), in dB.

The table of results is interactive, and reflects the measurements in progress. Any operation carried out on the trace is immediately entered in the table, so that you can see the result.

Summary page

To display a summary of the results, for 2 traces or more in overlay, select the Summary function. An additional window is displayed, with issue highlighted in case of problem, including bend with singlemode, and including propagation delay in multimode.

Fig. 29

Summary Results and Bend Table

In Summary mode, there is neither access to the events function nor to the expert mode because the Summary function analyzes two traces at the same time. Go back to the Table or Trace function to have access to these functions.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

Advanced functions in Expert mode

Automatic measurement and detection

Automatic mode enables rapid detection of all the faults in the trace. The faults detected are then measured and identified on the screen by markers. Only the results exceeding the detection threshold defined in the

ETUP

menu are displayed.

NOTE

Before starting an automatic measurement, make sure that the function

Lock Evts

(accessible by pressing

Advanced

), is not activated

(the icon trace).

must not be present in the left-hand corner under the

By means of this method of detection, you can quickly locate all the faults in the fiber under test.

If an automatic measurement does not detect all the events, additional manual measurements can be carried out.

To delete all the markers, press the

Advanced

key, then select

Del Res

When there have not been any measurements, to carry out an automatic measurement, press

Advanced

then select the function

Auto Mes.

The following procedure is recommended:

Fully automatic measurement: the instrument locates the events and proceeds to the measurements.

Addition of markers (see

“Addition of markers” on page 62

) in the cases of splices showing low attenuation and of close events. The

MTS/T-BERD 8000 then automatically measures the slope before and after the markers selected and measures the attenuation of the splice.

Addition of manual measurements if necessary (in the case of very close events). The MTS/T-BERD 8000 performs the measurements requested by the user.

To start an automatic measurement while a measurement is already in progress:

Press the

Advanced

key.

Select

Del Res.

Select

Auto Mes.

User Manual 780000102/19 61

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

Addition of markers

Addition of markers is a function only available in Expert Mode.

To carry out a measurement, it is advisable to go into the

ETUP

menu and:

– activate the alarm thresholds in

Result Screens > Alarms

– validate display of results on the trace in

Results on Trace = All

You can place markers of events on the trace at the exact position where you want to carry out automatic measurements.

You can also manually place markers in addition to those positioned automatically during automatic measurement. You can then start an automatic measurement to obtain the results on all the markers.

Representation of the markers

The markers are represented by the symbol : if they are set during automatic measurements (Advanced > Auto Meas.).

The markers are represented by the symbol if they are set during manual measurements using the

Set Event

key.

To add markers of events:

Select a cursor (A or B).

Use the direction keys to move the cursor to the place where you want to position a marker.

Press the key:

Set Event

An event marker is displayed at the position of the cursor and a measurement is carried out on the marker. Measurement of slope before the marker starts just after the previous event (or at the end of the dead zone at the beginning of the fiber); measurement of slope after the marker stops just before the next marker or at the end of the fiber.

Hints on the positioning of markers

– Do not add markers (with the

Set Event

key) after a manual measurement, as all the results will be recalculated automatically by the instrument.

62 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

– If two markers are too close together, they will appear on the trace and the table but no measurement will be carried out on the second marker: to obtain results for this marker, a manual measurement is necessary.

– If you press the

Set Event

key when the cursor is very close to a marker, the latter will be deleted.

Deleting markers

To delete a marker, move the cursor on to the marker and press the

Set

Event

key. The marker selected will be deleted and a complete measurement, without this marker, will be carried out.

To delete several markers, use the

Event

key to move from one marker to the other, then press the

Set Event

key as many times as necessary.

The cursor will be automatically moved on to the successive markers.

Deletion of markers can cause incorrect measurement results.

Modifying types of events

The types of events are detected automatically as a function of their optical signature. This can sometimes lead the system astray, if reflection from a connector is too strong (end of fiber?), if a splice has a very low insertion loss (slope?), etc. Similarly, some types of events cannot be recognized automatically from their signatures (for example, couplers, multiplexers, etc.). For this reason, it is advantageous in some cases to be able to change the type of events.

To do this:

– In the

Advanced

menu select

Manual measurement

– Select the

Event Code

button.

Fig. 30

Buttons used to modify types of events

User Manual 780000102/19 63

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

New, more specific event types are then proposed:

Splice

Connector

Mux/Demultiplexer

Separator/Coupler

End of fiber

Ghost

– Position the cursor on the line for which modification of event type is desired.

– Click on the button corresponding to the required type of event.

Table notes

With each event, it is possible to associate:

– a note of no more than 40 characters, entered by the user

– an indicator of uncertainty qualifying the result displayed.

NOTE

This information appears in the table, under the line relating to the event, if it has been validated in the

ETUP

menu on the

Notes

line.

Notes

For each wavelength, a maximum of 16 notes is possible.



For each note, 40 characters can be entered.

NOTE

Each note is associated with an event. Consequently, if the event is deleted, the note will be deleted too.

To enter a note:

– in the menu:

ETUP

> Result Screens > Notes

, the Notes option must be selected

– on the

Results

page, in the table, select the event

– press

Advanced

– press

Notes

– enter the text of the note in the edit menu that appears

– press

Confirm

and then

Exit

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

In the table of results, the user can display indicators to evaluate the uncertainty of the result. This function must be validated in the

ETUP

menu, on the

Notes

line.

The notes are displayed under the selected event, in the results table.

Uncertainty of results

The following cases are possible:

Indicators concerning attenuation measurements

2c manual

5c manual

Result of a manual measurement between the reference and the cursor using the

2-cursors method.

Result of a manual measurement using the 5-cursors method.

Global

Close evts

The attenuation displayed is a global result for Fresnel reflections which are not sufficiently separated.

As several events are too close together, only the attenuation of the last one is displayed.

Indicators concerning measurements of slope

Few pts

2 points

Measurement of slope by the least square approximation method without using many points of acquisition.

Measurement of slope by the 2-point method.

NOTE

The

ETUP

menu,

Notes

line, enables display of notes, of uncertainties or of neither the one nor the other. Notes cannot be displayed at the same time as uncertainties.

Modifying Link

Length

In Expert mode, once trace is displayed, you can modify the length of fiber.

Click on Advanced > Set Link Length.

A numeric keypad displays, with the current link length.

User Manual 780000102/19 65

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

Fig. 31

Expert mode: Link Length Modification

Enter the new length of the fiber.

Validate pushing the Entrer key.

The modification of the link length will automatically modify the

Index of Refraction of the fiber according to this new length value

(and by consequence, will modify the values of the events detected, in the results table).

Answer Yes or No to the message displayed, to keep or not this value for the link length for the future acquisitions

Manual measurements

As soon as you have made an acquisition, with or without automatic measurement, you can make manual measurements on any event on the trace by means of the cursors A and B, in association with the functions of slope, detection of splice and calculation of ORL.

The manual measurements are accessible in the Results page, after pressing the keys:

Advanced

, then

Manual Measurement

Measurements of slope

To make a manual measurement of slope, press the

ESULTS

button to call up the trace and then:

– Place the cursor A at the beginning of the section of the trace where the slope is to be measured.

– Place the cursor B at the end of this section.

– Press the

Advanced

key, then the

Manual

key, then select

Slope

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

– Press : the slope of the specified trace section is displayed.

This green cross shows that an alarm threshold has not been exceeded*

Slope

Reflectance

Fig. 32

Measurement results

*: A yellow icon would indicate there is a Warning alarm (thresholds are critical). A red cross would indicate the alarm thresholds have been exceeded.

Result of slope measurement

The result is displayed on the screen between the two slope indicators

[ and ].

The measurement results are also available in the table which you can display in its entirety by selecting the

Table

function (after pressing

Exit

twice to quit

Advanced

mode). In the table:

– "distance" shows the distance between the beginning of the trace and the end of the slope;

– "section" shows the distance between the previous event (which may also be the beginning of the link) and the end of the slope. Thus this section value is not equivalent to the distance between the two slope indicators [ and ].

– "Slope" shows the slope value in dB/km

User Manual 780000102/19 67

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

If no result is displayed in the table:

– the distance between the cursors A and B is too small.

Deleting a slope measurement

To delete a particular slope measurement result:

– superimpose the cursors A and B on the slope concerned

– select

Slope

(after, if necessary, pressing

Advanced

and then

Manual

– press : the slope of the specified trace section is deleted.

Performing splice and reflectance measurements

There are two methods of carrying out manual measurements of splices on the trace: the two-cursor method and the five-cursor method.

The five-cursor method is the more accurate, as it takes into account the difference of level between the slope before the splice and the slope after the splice. This method should be used whenever possible.

If very close events have created a dead zone preventing the measurement of slope by the five-cursor method, it is possible to use the twocursor method. This considers the difference in level between the cursors.

Before performing one of these measurements, go into the

ETUP

menu and define the splice detection threshold (All is recommended). Also confirm display of the results on the trace (Results on Trace= All or

Graphics only).

Two points method

To perform a splice measurement by the "two-points" method, display the

Results page, then:

Place cursor A exactly on the fault, then place cursor B after the splice that you wish to define.

Press the

Advanced

key, then

Manual Measurement

, then select the function

2 Pt Loss

Press .

The splice marker is placed at the point defined by the first (lefthand) cursor and the result is displayed on the screen. If the fault is reflective, the reflectance value is also measured and displayed.

These results are added to the table of results.

68 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

If no result is displayed, it is possible that the threshold of attenuation detection is higher than the attenuation that you are trying measure, or else you may have selected

Graphics only

on the

Results on

Trace

line.

NOTE

If you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not carried out and the following error message is displayed: "Slope found between two cursors

Five points method

To carry out a splice measurement by the "five points" method:

Measure the slope preceding the fault to be measured, then the slope following it.

Place the cursor on the fault (between the two sections).

Press the

Advanced

key, then

Manual Measurement

, then select

Pt Loss

Press .

The splice event marker is placed on the cursor and the result is displayed on the trace and in the table of results.

NOTE

If no result is displayed, it is possible that the display threshold of the attenuation measurement result is higher than the attenuation that you are trying to measure, or else, in the

ETUP

menu, you may have selected Results on Trace = None or Graphics only.

NOTE

If you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not carried out and the following error message is displayed: Slope found between two cursors

Manual measurement of

ORL

It is possible to carry out an ORL measurement on a part of the fiber.

Follow the following procedure to measure a part of the fiber:

Position the cursors A and B to delimit the section that you wish to measure.

Press the

Advanced

key, then

Manual Measurement

, then select

ORL

User Manual 780000102/19 69

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Advanced functions in Expert mode

Press defined.

. The ORL will be measured for the section of trace

Fig. 33

Result of ORL measurement

ORL on a saturated trace

If saturation occurs during an ORL measurement, the result is given with the sign

. This means that the actual ORL value is less than the value displayed.

Memorization of the position of events

To memorize the position of events with a view to repeating the measurements at the same place during a future acquisition or on another trace, press the

Advanced

key, then select

Lock Evts

. The event memorization icon will appear in the title bar.

The positions memorized will then be used in the subsequent measurements, either at the end of the manual acquisition, or when a stored trace is recalled.

NOTE

This function memorizes the markers placed on the current trace.

The following procedure is recommended to start a measurement with markers:

Carry out an automatic measurement.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Reference Trace function

Memorize the position of the events with the

Add Marker

key.

Add the manual measurements required (keys:

Advanced >

Manual Measurement

CAUTION

If a marker is added (with the

Add Marker

key) after manual measurements have been performed, then all the markers on the trace will be converted into AUTO markers and an automatic measurement will be performed using these markers. The previous manual measurements will be lost.

Provided the event memorization icon is displayed, the automatic measurement following the acquisition is carried out using the markers which were present before the acquisition.

If you wish to make a measurement without markers, deactivate memorization of events by pressing the

Free Evts

key.

Reference Trace function

The reference trace function consists in defining trace(s) which will be

«blocked» on screen and used as models before acquiring or loading other standard trace(s).

Using the reference trace function in the

Result page

Once one or several trace(s) is/are displayed, after an acquisition or loaded from the explorer:

If several traces are in overlay, check the correct current trace is selected

Go in the Advanced menu

Click on Overlay

Click on Set/Reset Ref. key.

The active trace becomes the reference trace;

–

– its number is displayed in red the icon

Reference trace

Active trace

appears on the upper right hand part of the results table.

To define all the traces displayed as reference traces, click on Set/Reset

All Ref.

key (whatever is the active trace).

User Manual 780000102/19 71

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

Reference Trace function

Removing the reference trace(s)

To change one reference trace into a «standard» trace, select it using the

Trace/Event

key, and in the Advanced > Overlay menu, click once again on Set/Reset Ref.

To change all the reference traces displayed into «standard» traces, whatever is the active trace, go in the Advanced > Overlay menu and click on Set/Reset All Ref..

Performing an acquisition once one or several trace(s) is/are defined

Three situations can occur once an acquisition is performed:

– Only reference trace(s) is/are displayed: the trace acquired is added to the reference ones.

– Reference trace(s) and «standard» trace(s) are displayed: the reference trace(s) are «blocked», the standard ones are removed and the new trace acquired is displayed with the reference one(s).

– No reference trace(s) defined: all the «standard» traces are removed and only the new trace acquired is displayed.

Using the reference trace function in the explorer

A trace stored in memory can be set as reference trace before loading one or several «standard» trace(s).

To open one or several reference trace(s):

Go on the File Explorer

Select the trace(s) to be defined as reference

Click on Load and select Reference = Yes on the key

Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.

– The trace(s) open(s) and its/their number(s) is/are displayed in red

Reference trace

– the icon table.

Active trace

appears on the upper right hand part of the results

To open «standard» traces to be added to the reference ones:

Go back to the explorer

Select the trace(s) to be opened in the same screen as the reference traces

Click on Load and select Reference = No on the key

72 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

File Management

Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.

– The trace(s) open(s) and its/their number(s) is/are displayed in black

Reference trace (active)

Standard trace

unless it is the active one

– in this case, the number turns green

Reference trace

the trace is displayed in green.

Standard trace selected

and

File Management

Storing OTDR measurements

Once the measurements have been made, results can be stored on different storage media.

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automatically.

If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

Click on the

ILE

key

Select

Setup

with the key

Setup/Explorer/Link Mgr.

Modify the parameters you want

Click on

Store Trace

The OTDR traces are stored with the extension ".SOR" or ".MSOR" according to the File Type selected (see

“File Type / Save Mode” on page 221

If in the line File Type, One msor file is selected, and if several OTDR traces are displayed in overlay, then one single file will be saved, with the

.msor extension., with all the traces (for example, in the case of a double acquisition: a short acquisition and the standard one).

Recalling OTDR files

Once a OTDR file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

Select

Explorer

with the key

Setup/Explorer/Link Mgr.

Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

Click on

Load

Click on

View Tace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management’ on page 217 .

User Manual 780000102/19 73

Chapter 4

Reflectometry measurements

File Management

74 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 5

Source option of the OTDR

Modules

According to your module, the source option is available in two different ways:

– either by pressing the Laser Source key onto the OTDR Setup page,

and selecting the source mode (see page 34

– or by selecting the icon Source on the System page. This mode is described in this chapter

This option is not available for UHD modules.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Source option” on page 76

User Manual 780000102/19 75

Chapter 5

Source option of the OTDR Modules

Source option

Source option

Activating the

Source fonction

The Source function is an option chosen at the time of order and incorporated into the OTDR module in the factory.

To activate the function:

– Press the

YSTEM

button

– Use the direction keys to select the Source icon section of the OTDR Module (framed in green)

– Press the validation key . The icon is selected

in the

Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source

Once the source icon is selected, click on the

ETUP

ESULTS

button to display the result page and to configure the source.

Fig. 34

Configuration of the source

–

Laser On / Laser Off

Activation or shut-down of the laser (same function as the

TART

TOP

button)

When the laser is on, the icon is displayed.

The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the result screen, by pressing the

Source Config.

soft key.

–

Wavelength

–

Mode

To change the wavelength when a multiwavelength source is present (depending on option).



The wavelength value is displayed.

To vary the mode of emission of the source. Possible modulation values are:

– 270 Hz / 330 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz

– CW (continuous emission)

– Auto

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

This chapter describes the different steps to perform an automatic bidirectional measurement (also called OEO measurement = Origin-End-

Origin).This measurement requires that two 8000 Base Units are connected at each extremity of the fiber under test. Every Base Unit must be equipped with the software option called «OEO-OTDR» and with both optical talkset and OTDR plug-in.

It is strongly recommended that the same type of OTDR is used

(same reference) at each extremity of the fiber.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Definition of terms used” on page 78

–

“Description of the measurement” on page 78

–

“Configuration of bi-directional measurement” on page 80

–

“Performing a bi-directional measurement” on page 82

–

“Trace display functions” on page 87

–

“OEO Result table” on page 89

–

“Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page” on page 90

–

“File management” on page 90

–

“Test of a cable” on page 91

–

“Troubleshooting” on page 92

User Manual 780000102/19 77

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Definition of terms used

Definition of terms used

Master / Slave unit

The master unit is the Base Unit that initiates the measurement at one extremity of the fiber.

The slave unit is the Base Unit connected on the other extremity of the fiber, and connected to the master unit via the data connection.

Local / remote unit

These terms are used in the Process Display page (see "Process page display (with two T-BERD 8000)" page 84 ). Each unit is considered

«Local» on its own screen.

NOTE

These terms are to be distinguished from the measurement direction and extremities of the fiber (see

"Fiber Description" page 222 )

Description of the measurement

NOTE

The measurement principle and methods used are described in "Principle of bi-directional measurement" page 4

Thanks to the software option OEO-OTDR, bi-directional measurement can be fully automatic.

A minimum of two fibers is required. Two Base Units equiped with the talkset option and an OTDR plug-in are linked at every extremity of the fiber to test at the same time. A data connection is established between the two talkset ports of the units via another fiber, in order to exchange orders, configurations and measurement results.

NOTE

For automatic bidirectional OTDR testing, two units having the talset option and the E80 bidirectional option are rquired.

78 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Description of the measurement

Example with 8000 series

Fully automatic bi-directional acquisitions can not be performed without a data connection (see «Data transfer» in the user manual of the

Base Unit, reference 8000M02 for example).

Please check that the OTDR function has been selected (see

"Selecting the function" page 32 ).

For best measurements and in order to qualify the fiber link and connectors, launch cables shall be inserted between the OTDR modules and the link.

Summary of the automatic operation procedure

– Test if both units are linked to the same fiber

– Consistency verification of the OTDR plug-in between the two units.

– Consistency verification of acquisition configuration, measurement and files, fiber and link definition. Then transfer of the master unit configuration to the slave unit if necessary.

– Acquisition start on the master unit

– Trace transfer to the slave unit

– Acquisition start on the slave unit

– Trace transfer to the master unit

– Bi-directional measurement on both units

– Results storage in a single «.OEO» file or in two «.SOR» files.

All this test procedure is fully automatic, and all results are immediately accessible on both units.

User Manual 780000102/19 79

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Configuration of bi-directional measurement

Configuration of bi-directional measurement

To access the OEO configuration menu, press the button

ETUP

from the

Base Unit. OEO parameters are now displayed.

Please check that the OEO-OTDR tab has been selected.

Acquisition parameters are the same as for OTDR measurements (see

"Configuring the reflectometry test" page 32

for their description). Only different or extra parameters are presented in this chapter.

Fig. 35

OEO test setup menu

Acquisition parameters

Laser

Mode

Acquisition will be performed on all selected wavelengths, as long as they are available on the remote

OTDR as well. If not, acquisition will be performed on all wavelengths selected and common to both OTDRs.

Please see the recommendation on page 78 about using the same type of OTDR)

Bi-directional measurement allows manual and Auto modes only. Operation is the same as for OTDR measurement.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Configuration of bi-directional measurement

Measurement parameters

Launch Cable End

This option allows the user to declare and describe the launch cables at the OTDR side of the other end of the fiber.

Evt1,2,3

Distance

Declaration of a launch cable on the remote OTDR, distance given from selected event 1, 2 or 3. Results related to this launch cable are eliminated from the table.

Use the

Edit Number

key to enter a distance (Min= 0 /

Max=1 10 km / 32.81 kfeet / 6.22 miles) or affect the active cursor value pushing the

Set Cursor Distance

button.

Default value : No

221 Box

The 221 box is used in order to link 2 fibers in one single fiber and get simultaneously the talkset and the OTDR laser.

Select Yes if a 221 box is used between the two Base Units.

Select No if this box is not used,

If Yes is selected on one equipment, do not forget to configure the second one to Yes as well.

If Yes has been selected, reboot both units, the local and the remote one.

Default value : No

Results Screen parameters

Alarms the alarms applie to the measurements average, and not to the measurements for each side (as it is in the classical OTDR mode)

Configuration of files parameters

To access the files configuration menu of the OEO-OTDR tab, press the button

ILE

Related parameters are then displayed.

All parameters to describe the files, the fiber and the link are proposed in order to save all measurements. Please refer to

"File configuration menu" page 218

. Only differences are presented in this chapter.

User Manual 780000102/19 81

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Performing a bi-directional measurement

File Type

This option allows to choose to save a bi-directional measurement under two different formats (see

"File management" page 90 ) :

A «.OEO» file The bi-directional measurement is saved in a single file

Two «.SOR» files The bi-directional measurement is saved in two different «.SOR» files

NOTE

For best use, it is recommended to use the auto file naming (with fiber code, origin, end, lambda, fiber name and auto-store). These parameters are applied on the master Base Unit.

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Process

Display

The Process page displays the bi-directional measurement steps, the

Curve

page displays the traces and results and the

Summary

page displays a summary of the results in a table (and the alarms result if alarms have been configured in the

Setup

page).

In order to display the Process page, make sure you are currently under the OEO-OTDR tab, and press the key

ESULTS

The key

View Curves/View Process

allows to change from the

Curve

page to the

Process

page and vice versa.

In order to select and follow the status of a measurement, go to the

Process

page.

NOTE

When a measurement has been started, the slave Base Unit automatically displays the Process page.

The Process screen is divided in three zones:

Information zone:

– Representation of the local Base Unit, with identification

– Representation of the distant Base Unit, with identification

1.includes the serial numbers of the mainframe and module as well as available wavelengths

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Performing a bi-directional measurement

– Status of the data connection : grayed when the link has been cut or the connection not yet established, yellow when the connection is operational

– Status of the fiber connection : this is the status of the last tested fiber. The fiber is represented cut and is grayed if the two units are not connected on the same fiber. If the two units are connected on the same fiber, the link does not appear cut. When a measurement is processed, the fiber is displayed in red

– When the fiber connection is established, information providing the module type and available wavelengths is displayed for both

local

and distant units

User guide zone:

A blue banner is displayed in the center of the screen where operation messages are displayed.

The icon for keeping all events in memory is displayed in this zone if the key

Lock Evt/Free Evts

is set on

Lock Evt.

In this case, the following measurement is performed using those markers (see

"Memorization of the position of events" page 70

)

NOTE

This function keeps markers in memory for both local trace and distance trace.

Measurement status zone :

When a bi-directional measurement has been launched, all the different steps in the measurement process are presented in this zone. Each one is detailed later in this chapter.

NOTE

The general information banner is displayed at the top of the screen as for all other tabs. When a OEO measurement is performed, Data and Remote mode icons are displayed as soon as a data connection is established.

2.requires active data connection

User Manual 780000102/19 83

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Data connection status

Information zone

Fiber connection status

User guide zone

Measuremen t status zone

Identifier of the origin or end of the fiber according to the direction OE

Information concerning local

Information concerning remote

Fig. 36

Process page display (with two T-BERD 8000)

If a 221 box is used, the upper part of the process page is represented as show below:

Representation of the 221 Box

Fiber status

Fig. 37

Process page display with a 221 box (with two MTS

6000)

In this case, the color of the fiber represented on the information zone changes according to the connection status:

– Grey: the connection is in progress

– Green: the connection has been correctly established

– Red: the connection has failed

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Fiber link check

To ensure that the two units are connected to the same fiber under test, select

Check same fiber

. If the fiber is the same at both extremities, a

symbol will be displayed on the measurement status zone.

Measurement process

Fiber measurement

Step 1.

– Choose to use the markers stored in memory or not by selecting

Lock Evt

Free Evts

NOTE

If the markers events are already defined for the link, you may select the

Lock Evt

key. This implies that the unit will now perform measurements with those markers. Otherwise select

Free Evts

– Press

TART

to begin the measurement.

The line Check if same set up on both units becomes In progress... .

NOTE

A warning may occur if the configurations of the two units are different

(see "Warning/errors resulting from checking common configurations" page 93

The begin launch cable is transferred to the end launch cable, and the

end

launch cable is transferred to the begin launch cable. The master

Base Unit must indeed know both extremities of the fiber and will send the information to the slave Base Unit. The direction of the link is defined by the master Base Unit, which transmits the opposite direction to the slave Base Unit.

In the File configuration, each Base Unit points to its own directory. Only the master Base Unit may save a measurement. <Auto storage> and

<File type>

parameters only concern the master unit and are not compared or transferred to the slave Base Unit.

The list of lasers for which a measurement will be performed is set by the master Base Unit. If these lasters are not all available on the slave

Base Unit, the list shall be restricted to the ones that are available.

When both menus

ETUP

and

ILE

are identical, the validation symbol

is displayed and the process goes to Step 2.

User Manual 780000102/19 85

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Step 2

The line <Check if same fiber for both units> becomes <In progress...>. If the master Base Unit successfully detects the other Base Unit at the extremity of the fiber under test, the validation symbol is displayed, and the process proceeds to Step 3. Otherwise, the red cross is displayed and the measurement is stopped.

Step 3

The master Base Unit performs the acquisition using the first wavelength in the list. The acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each Base Unit, either in the «Local» column or the

«Remote»

column, depending on which Base Unit is considered. When the measurement is terminated, the message <Completed> is displayed.

The trace is transferred to the other Base Unit.

Step 4

The slave Base Unit performs the acquisition using the same wavelength. The message acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each Base Unit, either in the «Local» column or the

«Remote»

column, according to which Base Unit is considered. The message <Completed> is displayed when the measurement is terminated,. The trace is transferred to the master Base Unit.

Step 5

The bi-directional measurement is completed.

NOTE

The message <Impossible measurement> is displayed if the measurement has not been able to detect the end of the fiber on any of the two traces. The measurement must be performed once more with new acquisition parameters or by placing markers manually on the measurement.

Step 6

Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5 are performed for each wavelength to test.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to stop the measurement at any step of the process, by pressing the button

TART

TOP

on the master Base Unit.

It is also possible to request from the slave Base Unit that the measurement is stopped, by pressing the button

TART

TOP

. The master unit receives the request via a message on the screen: <Remote asks for stop, do you agree ?>. If Yes, the measurement is stopped, if No, the measurement resumes.

86 User Manual 780000102/19

Trace display functions

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Trace display functions

Selection :

– Local

– Remote

– Bi-Directional

Fig. 38

Butterfly representation of the bi-directional measurement

By selecting the

Curves

, with the

Process / Curves / Summary

key, the unit displays the traces and results like in classical OTDR mode, adding bi-directional measurement results.

In the Curve page, the multi-choice key

allows to visualize successively the local trace, the remote trace, or both superposed.

NOTE

The remote trace is reversed in order to superpose both traces in a

«butterfly fashion» (see "Butterfly representation of the bi-directional measurement" page 87 ).

1.In our example, St-Etienne corresponds to the extremity connected to the local unit, Lyon corresponds to the extremity connected to the remote unit.

User Manual 780000102/19 87

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Trace display functions

NOTE

You may only use this key to change page when the measurement is completed. When the measurement is completed, the Curve page corresponding to the local Base Unit is automatically displayed (Ori-

gin

if the direction of the link has been defined O->E, End if the direction of the link has been defined E->O).

Select the Summary function using the

See Process/Curves/Summary

key, to visualize the results in a sumary, with the Total Loss & Total ORL for each wavelength.

Fig. 39

Summary display with OEO traces

An additional table can be displayed under the summary, with issue highlighted, in case of problem.

Fig. 40

Warning on the OEO results

Origin and End traces

Bi-directional measurement may be performed using up to 4 different wavelengths. We can therefore analyze successively up to 4 couples of

Origin and End traces.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

OEO Result table

In order to go from one couple to another, activate the

Wavelength/Evt

key, select

Wavelength

, and move from one trace to another using arrows.

These traces are OTDR traces. All regular OTDR functions are proposed to modify the display (Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale,...).

Just like in OTDR mode, the user will be able to work on these traces in order to analyze the fiber : by moving events, consulting the selected trace associated result table, asking for an auto-measurement, adding

markers,

and doing manual measurements. See ,

"Table of results" page 58

, "Modifying Link Length" page 65

, "Addition of markers" page 62

and

"Manual measurements" page 66 .

When the user comes back to

OEO trace

, all modifications that can have been done on either the Origin curve or on the End curve are now taken in account. The OEO measurement is performed again.

OEO trace

Only one couple of OE and EO traces is displayed, corresponding to one wavelength.

If the measurement has been performed on different wavelengths, select

Wavelength

on the key

Wavelength/Evt

in order to go from one couple of traces to another, using arrows.

Functions such as Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale... are all the same as for OTDR but the table result as well as the use of markers are specific to OEO measurements.

OEO Result table

Bi-directional measurement results use principles described in

"Principle of bi-directional measurement" page 4 .

The total loss of the fiber (on the line specifying the total number of events) is resulting from the average between the total loss calculated in the direction O->E and the total loss calculated in the other direction.

Three tables are available in the OEO curve page, each showing attenuation, slope and reflectance. In order to go from one table to another, use the

Advanced

key followed by the

Loss/Slope/Reflect.

key and select one of the three possibilities.

User Manual 780000102/19 89

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page

Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page

Key <Del Res/

Auto Meas>

When this key is activated in the EOE page, and

Del Res

> is selected,

OEO measurement is erased as well as OTDR measurement, for both origin and end traces.

When

Auto Meas

is selected, auto-measurement is performed once more for both origin and end traces, resulting in a new OEO measurement.

Addition of markers

In order to modify a marker on any of both origin and end traces, select cursor A or B, position your cursor when you want to modify or add a marker and press the key

Set Event

– If there was no marker at this position, a new one is added on both origin and end traces

– If there was two markers, one on each of both origin and end traces, both are deleted

– If there was only one marker, either on the origin trace or on the end trace, a second marker is added, on the trace when none was present.

Markers display

Markers are available on the trace taken from the origin.

Markers are available on the trace taken from the end.

NOTE

Acquisitions must be done with the same resolution. If not, the addition of markers can not be performed perfectly.

File management

Storing OEO measurements

At the end of a bi-directional measurement, the user has the possibility to save the origin trace as well as the end trace for each wavelength :

– either in a single «.OEO» file,

– or in two different «.SOR» files.

90 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Test of a cable

Traces may be stored manually or automatically on the master unit. They can be stored manually on the slave unit.

If you had entered Auto Store, then the results will be saved automatically.

If not, click on format.



ILE

to access the OTDR

Then, press the

Store Trace

key.

File

menu and select the right

Recalling OEO traces

Recalling a «.OEO» file:

If the OEO software option is available, loading a «.OEO» file with the

Load

key followed by

View Trace

key will open automatically the OEO-

OTDR tab in order to display the OEO trace.

Recalling two «.SOR» files:

Wether the OEO software option is available or not, if the two «.SOR» files corresponding to a bi-directional measurement are selected, the key

Load Bi-dir.

appears. The OEO trace is then displayed.

NOTE

If both traces are not compatible (not performed using the same wavelength and pulse width), a error message is displayed <Acquisition parameters for these two files are different ! >

For further information on File management, see Chapter 14 “File management on page 217’

Test of a cable

In order to test a full cable, it is first necessary to make a OEO reference trace, where all fiber events have been marked on both origin and end traces. This trace may be obtained by requesting an auto-measurement after which markers may be added, or by performing a manual measurement.

The next step consists in memorizing all markers, by selecting

Lock Evts

in the Process page.

User Manual 780000102/19 91

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Troubleshooting

NOTE

If the auto mode was set for the referencing, it is recommended to change to manual mode for the next fibers. This will ensure that setup parameters used for all the fibers will be the same than those used for the reference trace.

Finally, a bi-directional automatic measurement is performed for each fiber. Results are stored in either one «.OEO» file or two «.SOR» files.

Troubleshooting

Warning/errors after pressing the key S

TART

Error message

No data link. Activate connection before

TART

No tab OEO-

OTDR on remote

8000 Unit

Remote 8000

Unit not ready

No resource for remote 8000 Unit

No response from remote 8000 Unitt

Possible problem

No data connection

No software option

OEO-OTDR on remote Base Unit

OTDR resource has not been selected

OTDR resource is already being used

Data link problem

Possible solution

Go back to

System

page to establish a connection

Bi-directional measurement impossible if no software option on remote Base Unit

Go back to the System page on the remote 8000 Unit to select the OTDR function

Stop measurement on remote 8000 Unit to free the resource

Check the data connection

92 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Troubleshooting

Warning/errors resulting from checking common configurations

Message

No common laser: acquisition is impossible

Lasers are different. Do you want to continue?

Acquisition configs are different. Transfer config to remote?

File configs are different.

Transfer config to remote?

Acquisition and files configs are different. Transfer config to remote?

Action possible

Select a Base Unit equiped with the same type OTDR plug-in

Yes

: measurement will occur using selected lasers common to both Base Units.

: measurement is stopped.

Yes

: the

ETUP

configuration is transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit.

: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.

Yes

: the

ILE

configuration is transferred and applied to the remote Base Unit.

: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.

Yes

: The

ETUP

and

ILE

configurations are transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit.

: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped

User Manual 780000102/19 93

Chapter 6

Bi-directional OTDR

Troubleshooting

94 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum

Measurement

This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an optical signal, or analyzing effects from an optical components or network elements like EDFA, DFB-sources... , by a Base Unit equipped with a 507XXX series module (and a 507Ext extension card) or with a 81WDM / 81WDMPMD module or with the OSA-XXX series.

The OSA-150/18x/3xx/5xx/500R are only available on MTS / T-BERD

8000 platforms.

The OSA-110M is available on MTS / T-BERD 6000 and 8000 platforms

OSA-500R

OSA-500

OSA-181

OSA-180

OSA-150

35pm 50dBc

70pm 45dBc X

70pm 45dBc

100pm 40dBc

OSA-110M

100pm 40dBc

X X X X X X X X Option

X X X X X X X Option

X X X

NOTE

Looking for the OSA-type and series Nr. press

YSTEM

Help

Page.

User Manual 780000102/19 95

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Laser safety” on page 97

–

“Transportation” on page 97

–

“Configuration of the instrument” on page 97

–

“OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 98

–

“Acquisition” on page 110

–

“Trace display functions” on page 110

–

“Table of results” on page 114

–

“Channel filtering” on page 117

–

“Drift measurement” on page 118

–

“EDFA results analysis” on page 120

–

“DFB results analysis” on page 122

–

“Testing ROADM networks” on page 125

–

“Measurement of I-OSNR” on page 126

–

“File Management” on page 130

1.Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Laser safety

Laser safety

This device (OSA-110M) contains a Class 1 Laser product according to

DIN EN 60825-1. Please take notice of following instructions

When the system or device is switched on, never look directly into the in- and output or into a connected optical fiber.

Please heed the normal precautions for working with lasers and consider local regulations.

Transportation

The OSA-110M/150/18x/500/500R can be damaged during transportation with improper packaging.

Modules without a T-BERD/MTS should be shipped only in the original packaging.

For shipping of a MTS-6000 containing an OSA, use either the original packaging with the black rubber foam, or the transportation case referenced E60HCASE-OSA.

For shipping of a MTS-8000 containing an OSA, use either the original packaging with the black rubber foam, or the transportation case referenced E80HCASE-OSA.

Using the original packing material ensures that the device is properly protected during shipping. Otherwise, JDSU cannot give warranty on modules good protection.

If you need a new packaging, please contact JDSU Technical

Assistance Center.

Configuration of the instrument

The instrument configuration menu will be displayed directly after power up or by pressing the

YSTEM

-button.

The actual module status will be shown (ON/OFF) on system window

For configuring the OSA press the OSA-icon (by touchscreen) , or select the function icon by arrow-keys and press

NTER

Press

ESULT

button to see the OSA-result window.

User Manual 780000102/19 97

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

If the MTS / T-BERD 8000/6000(A) is switched OFF in this configuration, the next start up will directly start the to OSA-application,and display the result window.

For more details about the general MTS-configuration see the Base Unit manual.

For measurement, connect the fiber to be tested on the optical input of the selected module.

NOTE

The maximum optical input power for example: OSA-xxx = +23dB

Kind of input connector:

– if the protection cap is green the optical input interface is a angled physical connector (APC-type)

– if it is a black protection cap, the interface type is physical connector

(PC-type)

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an OSA test on a fiber, press the

ETUP

button.

The various measurement parameters are proposed:

NOTE

With OSA-320/OSA-500R two auto modes are available: Test Auto

WDM mode and Test Auto I-OSNR mode.

Setup in Test Auto mode

Parameter Test Auto WDM

Test Auto I-OSNR

(only OSA-320 and

OSA-500R)

Acquisition settings

Sweep

Sweep range

Averaging acquisition

I-OSNR sensitivity

Resolution

Full

Not available single ext. C Band

Not available

Low (Fast)

Full

98 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Measurements settings

Type

Channel detection

Signal threshold

Min channel spacing

OSNR

OSNR method

Noise Shape

S<->N distance

Noise acq BW

SNR Meas. Type

Splitter compensation

Tilt&Slope Gain

WDM permanent

Auto

Std 50GHz

I-OSNR left & right

Not available

Auto std 0.1 nm

S/N

Not available

Filtered

Not available

Results screen settings

Grid

Alarms

Wavelength range

Table notes

Unit

Show I-OSNR trace default = last value used

Auto

No nm

Configuration of the file set-up (see

Chapter 14

)

Filenaming

Auto Store

Nb Fiber Increment

[Cable_id][Fiber_Num][Test_Poin ][Direction]

Yes

or define your own configuration

The parameter to be modified must be selected by means of the direction keys . The possible options then appear on the screen: make your choice using the direction keys and .

The various parameters proposed are defined below.

User Manual 780000102/19 99

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Fig. 41

Setup for optical spectrum measurements

100

Fig. 42

Setup for optical spectrum measurements OSA-

110M

Acquisition

Parameters

NOTE

With 507XXX series and 81XXX series modules, a warning message appears and the signal is cut off when the power of a channel is greater than 10 dBm or when the composite power of the input signal is greater than 20 dBm.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

NOTE

OSA-xxx warning message appears when the channel power is greater than +18dBm or the composite power greater than +23dBm

Input port

This line only appears when the OSA 303 module is used.

The choices are:

– A: acquisition on port A

– B: acquisition on port B

– A+B : : acquisition on both ports

Acquisition band (only appears when 81WDMPMD module is used)

– OESCL Acquisition will be performed on full band.

– SCL Acquisition will only be performed on S, C and L bands.

Sweeps

– Continuous: there will be a measurement with refreshment of the trace and real time display of results

– Single:

– Statistics

– Filtering:

– Drift: there will be one single measurement and the display of its results in this mode, the number of samples concerned by statistics must be entered (next parameter).

only appears for OSA-modules with channel isolation / drop option (OSA-XX1 and OSA-320) for measuring power, wavelength and signal to noise ratio over time.

The number of sweeps and the wait time between the sweeps need to be set.

NOTE

For Drift measurements a Grid needs to be defined and the Channel

Detection parameter is set to Grid.

Sweep Range

Select the wavelength numbers or Full parameter to use all wavelength available.

User Manual 780000102/19 101

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

I-OSNR sensitivity: (only valid for OSA-320 and OSA-500R)

This parameter defines the resolution of the polarization nulling routine for true in-band OSNR measurement.

– Low(fast):

– Medium

– High low sensitivity mode for fast measurements, recommended for ROADM system testing at data rates up to 12.5Gbps and OSNR values ≤ 25dB recommended for data rates of ≥ 40Gbps and OSNR

≥ 22 dB, or for data rates up to 12.5Gbps and OSNR

≥ 25dB.

recommended for data rates of ≥ 40Gbps and OSNR

≥ 22 dB

Averaging acquisition

No (1 sweep), Low (4 sweeps), Medium (16 sweeps), High (32 sweeps)

This function can reduce the noise level of a value up to 5 dB. When the acquisition is averaged, a bar graph showing the state of advancement of the averaging is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

Resolution (not available with OSA-110M)

– Full maximum resolution bandwith of the OSA (value depends on specification of OSA-XXX module). Typical values are shown in

OSA type overview table (for example OSA-180 typ. 70pm, see

page 95

– 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.4 or 0.5 nm for 507XXX series and 81XXX series plugins.

– 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5, 1, 2 or 5 nm for modules OSA-XXX.

Number of sweeps

In Statistics mode, this must be selected between 2 and 1000.

Long Term

NOTE

A long term measurement can be done only if the Sweep parameter is on Statistic mode.

Long term time diagram:

– number of sweeps 7

– wait period 5s

102 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

|----|----|----|-----|----|----|

time distance between the next acquisition = wait period (time)

– No,

– Manual the measurement is done manually, once the key

Stop

Wait

is pressed

– Period the measurement is automatically done, after the wait period selected (see hereunder).

Wait Period

The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start (only active if Long Term is positioned on Period)

– Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute, then increments of 1 minute up to 10 minutes, then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes; then increment of 1 hour up to 24 hours.

Measurement parameters

Those parameters are only linked to the current active fiber.

Type (not available for OSA-110M, fix WDM / OSNR)

– WDM / I-OSNR(only valid for OSA-320 and OSA-500R)

Module is used for measuring the 'true' in-band OSNR by using the polarization nulling method. This mode is recommended for OSNR measurements in ROADM based networks. See

"Testing ROADM networks" p 125

– WDM / OSNR

– EDFA

Module is used to measure the optical spectrum of an optical signal. Standard WDM results are displayed in

the results table. (See "Display of the WDM / OSA results" p 111

)

Module is used to analyze results from an EDFA. EDFA results are displayed in the results table. (See

"EDFA results analysis" p 120 )

– DFB Module is used to analyze results from a DFB. DFB

results are displayed in the results table (See "DFB results analysis" p 122 ).

User Manual 780000102/19 103

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

– FPL

– LED

Module is used to analyze results from a Fabriperot

Laser. FPL results are displayed in the results table.

Module is used to analyze results from a LED. LED results are displayed in the results table.

Channel Detection parameters

To modify these parameters, go to the Channel detection line. A submenu then appears proposing the following options:

– Grid The grid serves as a detection reference: it must therefore be Regular, Manual, ITU DWDM, ITU CWDM,

LR4/ER4-100G, LR4/ER4-40G or 10x10-100G. The choice of grid takes priority over the choice Channel

Selection. For example, it is not possible to choose

Channel selection = Grid, if the option selected for the grid is «Without» or «Conventional».

– Permanent Automatic detection of the channel on each acquisition.

In this mode the channels are always detected without making a reference measurement.

NOTE

At the end of an acquisition in permanent mode, it is possible to create a grid on the basis of the channels detected. To do this, press the key

Adopt Grid

in the

ETUP

menu.

The new Grid can be shown as table by pressing View Grid in the

Setup menu.

Signal threshold

Threshold of detection of channels (see “Channel detection threshold” on page 112 ).

– Auto.

the threshold is determined automatically.

– Manual from -79.9 to +10 dBm (OSA: +20 dBm)..

Use direction keys or

Edit Number

to modify values (Min=79.9 dBm /

Max=10.0 dBm (OSA: 20.0 dBm))

104

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

NOTE

Modification of the parameters

Channel detection

and

Signal threshold

will only modify the results if the WDM module present is the one that was used for the acquisition.

Min. Channel spacing: (only available in OSA-xxx)

Defines the minimum spacing of two adjacent optical channels in the system.

This parameter is also used to set the range for integration to measure the accurate total signal power of an optical channel. (see table contents

page 114

) The window for channel power integration will be ±1/2 the min. channel spacing setting left and right to the channel center frequency.

The measurement result will be displayed in the WDM table as 'Level' in dBm.

OSNR parameters

To modify these parameters, go to the OSNR line. A sub-menu then appears proposing the following options:

– WDM mode settings

– OSNR method

Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise measurement is taken (left, right, average left and right, worst case of left and right).

– S<->N distance:Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of reference for the noise.

- Auto: distance determined according to spacing of channels.

- Manual: enter a value: 25 GHz (0.2 nm), 50 GHz (0.4 nm),100

GHz (0.8 nm) from the peak if the unit is THz.

– I-OSNR mode settings (only available for OSA-320 or OSA-500R in

I-OSNR mode)

- Noise Shape:

Filtered: evaluation for mixed filter shaped ROADM networks

Unfiltered: evaluation for flat top filter shaped ROADM networks

- Noise Acq. Bandwidth: Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise:

- standard 0.1 nm

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

User Manual 780000102/19 105

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

- values lie between 0.05 nm and 1.0 nm.

Splitter compensation

When the measurement is made by the intermediary of a separator (also known as a splitter), it is possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value measured before or after it.

Go to the

Splitter compensation

line to display a sub-menu proposing the following options

– Value

– Unit

Yes: activation of compensation and choice of its value using the keys and : or the numeric keypad : from 1 to 30 dB (by increments of 1) or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%).

Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value measured.

For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The trace will be offset upwards by

10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dBm will be displayed

-20 dBm.

Tilt & Slope Gain

– No/Yes Validates measurement and display of the max. difference in gain (in dB) and slope of the gain (in dB per nm or by THz) above the trace.

NOTE

This button will be available if at least two channels are detected.

Parameters of display and analysis of the results

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

106

Grid

Go to the

Grid

line to access the Grid sub-menu. Select the

Type

line to see the different choices and modify them if required.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Five possible types of grid are proposed with different corresponding values, some of which are fixed or non-applicable, others editable.

The type «Conventional» and the option «Without» do not give access to the parameters of the Grid sub-menu; the LR4/ER4-100G, LR4/ER4-

40G, and the 10x10-100G are fix channels plan;.

– LR4/ER4-100G 229.0 THz, 229.8 THz, 230.6 THz, 231.4 THz

– LR4/ER4-40G: 1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, 1331 nm

– 10x10-100G 1523 nm, 1531 nm, 1539 nm, 1547 nm, 1555 nm, 1563 nm, 1571 nm, 1579 nm, 1587 nm,

1595 nm

The others give access to certain options, as shown in the table below:

Table 1

Grid menu options for each type of grid

Grid name

First ITU channel (with display in nm)

Channel spacing

Number of channels

Define channels

ITU CWDM

Editable

ITU standard

G.694.2

Editable, from

1270 to 1611 nm, by increments of 20 nm

20 nm

Editable, from 1 to 18 by increments of 1

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the band, and name each channel

ITU DWDM

Editable

G.692

Editable, from

1250.05 to 1649.93 nm, by increments corresponding to the channel spacing selected

Editable, from 25 to

200 GHz

Regular

Editable

N/A

Editable from

1250 to 1650 nm, by increments of 0.01 nm.

Editable, from 1 to

256 by increments of 1

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the band, and name each channel

Editable from 20 to 1000 GHz by increments of 1 at each click, of

10 if key is held down

Editable, from 1 to 256 by increments of 1

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the band, and name each channel

Manual

Editable

N/A

Editable from 1 to 256

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the band, and name each channel

User Manual 780000102/19 107

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

108

NOTE

The maximum real number of channels for ITU grids depends on the value selected for the first channel and the spacing between the channels.

NOTE

It is possible to display the grid with the View Grid key. A table then appears showing the channel number, the name of the channel, the reference wavelength and the alarm thresholds for delta F, min. P, max. P and min. SNR.

Alarms

When

Channel Detection

is positioned on

Grid

, it is possible to activate an alarm system. This system is based on a system of thresholds. Any measurement results that exceed these thresholds are displayed in red in the table, and the icon appears at the top right of the screen. If all the results are within the thresholds (no result is in red), the icon becomes .

To activate the alarm system, go to the <Alarms> line and select "Active".

Thresholds can then be set (using the direction keys or numeric keypad), to global level or to the level of each channel:

Global alarms

Number of channels Yes/No

Delta channel power

Delta OSNR

No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB

Composite power

No or threshold modifiable from -59.9 dBm to

+20 dBm

Channel alarms

– Max channel offset

: No/Freq/Wavelen.

– Min. channel power

– Max. channel power

– Min. OSNR

Yes/No

1.Max. acceptable variation between max. power and min. power on all channels

2.Max. acceptable variation between max. SNR and min. SNR on all channels

3.Maximum composite power

4.Wavelength drift. Selection of the alarm on the basis of the value of delta F

5.The values are then defined in Min. P

6.The values are then defined in Max. P

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

–

Channel Number:

Channel value:

From «001» to the max. number of channels.

Display of the wavelength of the channel number selected

– Delta F / Delta WL

: From 0 to 2 THz (2 THz is the default value) or from 0 to 8 nm. The unit depends on the value of the parameter Max channel offset

– P Min.

: From -80 dBm to +9.9 dBm (below max. threshold)

– P Max.

– SNR:

From -79.9 dBm to +10 dBm (above min. threshold)

From 0 to 50 dB

Wavelength range (not available for OSA-110M, use Zoom Mode instead)

Parameter to set the display wavelength range.

NOTE

The OSA-xxx modules always perform a measurement scan over the selected sweep range.

This parameter just sets the wavelength range to be displayed as a trace

– Auto

– Full

– C+L Band

– C Band display automatically zooms into the the wavelength range where optical channels are present full wavelength range

1530-1625nm

1530-1565nm

– Start/ End manually selectable start / end wavelengths

– Center / Span manually selectable center /span.

– ext. C+L Band 1525-1625nm

– ext. C Band 1525-1570nm

Zoom Mode (for OSA-110M only)

Parameter to set the display wavelength range.

7.The values are then defined in Min. SNR

1.Delta of frequency or wavelength

2.Minimum power

3.Maximum power

User Manual 780000102/19 109

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Acquisition

This parameter just sets the wavelength range to be displayed as a trace

– Auto display automatically zooms into the wavelength range where optical channels are present

– Manual full wavelength range or choosen by the zoom function of the result page

Table Notes

Here the display can be configured and it can be specified whether or not it is possible to enter a note for each channel (see "Table notes" p 116 ).

– Select Manual to enter manually a note for each channel in the results table.

– Select ITU-Ch to automatically enter the ITUchannel on each channel displayed in the results table.

Units

Here the units of the x axis can be selected:

– Frequency in THz

– Wavelength in nm

Acquisition

To start a measurement press

TART

key. The OSA-XXX will scan over the entire wavelength range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular format.

Fast acquisition (not available for OSA-xxx modules): press the

TART

key and hold it down for some time.

Normal acquisition: press the

TART

key briefly.

Only «Normal acquisition» mode operates with modules OSA-XXX.

When acquisition is complete, an automatic measurement is performed.

Trace display functions

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see example

Figure 11 on page 18 .

110 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Trace display functions

A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace

(Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.). See

“Functions relating to display of a trace” on page 23

See “Overlaying several traces stored in memory” on page 27

for overlay of traces.

Display of the

WDM / OSA results

The results window, obtained by pressing the

ESULTS

button, shows different zones displaying, from top to bottom:

– the mini-trace in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the principal characteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory.

– the trace results associated with cursors A and B

– the trace proper (see

“Trace display functions” on page 110

–

the table of results (see “Table of results” on page 114 ).

The trace represents power (in dBm) as a function of frequency (in THz) or wavelength (in nm). The channels detected are represented by peaks.

NOTE

If several acquisitions are performed, the trace displayed is the one corresponding to the last acquisition.

Successive zooms on the different channels

– Zoom on one of the channels as shown previously.

– Press the

Trace>/<Channel

key

– Use the &

 keys to move the zoom on the successive channels.

<Trace> /<Table> key

This key offers a choice from the following displays:

– Trace alone:main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the page.

– Trace + Table:display of trace, reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table of results.

– Table: display of the table alone

User Manual 780000102/19 111

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Trace display functions

Wavelengths and power at point of trace referenced by cursors A and B

Mini-trace display

Distance S to N

Number of acquisitions

Wavelength and power difference between cursors A and B

Fiber Number

Channel

File name

Alarm result

Number of the channel

112

Fig. 43

Example of OSA test result (with grid)

Channel detection threshold

On the trace, some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels. It is therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level: only peaks that exceed this threshold will be considered as channels and included in the table of results.



To display or modify this threshold, press the

ETUP

key, then select

Signal threshold

. Modify the value to position it on

Auto

or fix a threshold value.

Display of a grid

The display window of the trace can include a grid to facilitate verification of the position of the channels. Several grids are possible (see the chapter

"Parameters of display and analysis of the results" p 106

)

Display of total power between cursors

To display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B:

Place the cursors at the desired positions.

Press the

Advanced

key, then

Total Power A<--->B

1.The "Auto" value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold below the minimum value of -79.9 dBm

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Trace display functions

The space between the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and the power is displayed in the form "P=-4.95dBm".

Pressing the key

Total Power A<-->B

a second time removes the result of the total power measurement.

Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results

The Base Unit can display two additional results:

– The gain tilt, that is to say the difference between the max.and min. values of the peaks of the complete signal spectrum between the cursors.

– The gain slope measured by a method using a least squares algorithm on all detected channel using peak power levels or channel power levels.

To display these results above the channels:

Press the Advanced button

Press Measure A<->B button

Select the cursor and set it to the measurement range limits

Press Tilt/Slope A<->B

The Gain Tilt is displayed in dB.

The Gain Slope is traced and displayed as value dB/THz or dB/nm according to the units selected

Disable the Tilt and Slope by pressing the Tilt/Slope button again.

Fig. 44

Display of total power, gain tilt and slope of the gain between the cursors

User Manual 780000102/19 113

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Table of results

Table of results

Lines

According to the choice made in the

ETUP

menu, the table of results may include:

– either a line for each channel detected (if Channel Selection =

Permanent)

– or a line for each graduation, (if Channel Selection = Grid and a grid is selected)

Type of display

The table may be displayed in a single line, on half of the screen or the

whole screen as a function of the Trace/Table key (see "<Trace> /

<Table> key" p 111 )

Contents of the table without statistics

In the absence of statistics (see

"Measurement parameters" p 103

) the parameters given for each channel are:

the number of the channel

the frequency or the channel wavelength according to the unit selected

the spacing between the channels or the offset from the grid in THz or in nm

the level of the channel in dBm

For 507xxx series and 81xxx series this parameter indicates the peak channel power level

For OSA-xxx this parameter indicates the calculated total channel power level from the detected channels, achieved by mathematical power integration over ± ½ min channel spacing around the channel

center frequency.(see “Min. Channel spacing: (only available in

OSA-xxx)” on page 105

). This power level may differfrom the peak power level indicated by cursor evaluation in the graphical trace.

NOTE

The power integration method is used to avoid wrong channel power

 measurement with modulated signals having a larger bandwidth than

 the optical filter resolution bandwidth of the OSA.

114 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Table of results

The noise level in dBm (for all modules except OSA-320 and OSA-

500R)

Indicates the noise level measured left and right of the peak of the optical channel (out-of-band noise measurement). The noise level is normalized to the selected noise acquisition bandwidth (see noise acq. Bandwidth setting)

NOTE

The noise level depends on the noise acquisition bandwidth so the noise level may be different to the result in the graphical trace.

NOTE

For OSA-320 and OSA-500R, in I-OSNR measurement mode, the noise level is calculated based on the polarization nulling method indicating the noise level at the channel transmission wavelength (inband noise measurement).

The optical signal to noise ratio for the channel in dB.

In WDM mode this parameter indicates the out of band SNR result based on the out-of-band noise measurement.

NOTE

For OSA-320 and OSA-500R, with I-OSNR setting, this parameter indicates the "true" I-OSNR (in-band OSNR) measured with the polarization nulling method.

The ratio between the power of the channel and the composite power in %.

Contents of the table with statistics

When selecting the Statistics measurement mode and multiple acquisitions are performed, statistics are calculated on the results. To display these results in the table, press the Table Contents key, then Statistics.

Different Statistics keys are available to choose the content of the table display for each channel.

The following statistics can be selected: wavelength or frequency statistics, power statistics, and SNR statistics.

The display will give current value, average value, max. value, min. value and standard deviation, or delta between min and max (selectable).

User Manual 780000102/19 115

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Table of results

In the mode Statistics Mixed the table will show a mixture of statistical results: current, min. and max of wavelength or frequency, and current, min. and max of the power levels.

Channel sort

The channels can be classified in the table in ascending order of frequency (or wavelength), level or SNR.

To modify this order:

Press the

Table Contents

key, then

Sort

Press

Wavel. Sort, Level Sort

SNR Sort

Successive addressing of channels according to the sort type selected

On the trace and in the table, it is possible to move the cursor from one channel to the next in the selected sort order. To do this,:

Use the key

Cursor A>/<Cursor B

to choose the cursor A or B to be used on the trace.

Press the

Channel

key

Press and to move the cursor to the following or preceding channel:

Table notes

A note of not more than 40 characters, entered by the user, may be associated with each channel.

NOTE

Each note is associated with a channel. Consequently, if the channel is deleted, the note will be deleted too.

NOTE

These notes appear in the table only if they have been validated in the

ETUP

menu on the

Table notes

line (Result screen). Similarly, this option must be confirmed in order to be able to create a note.

To enter a note:

In the table, select the channel.

Press the

Table Contents

key, then press

Notes

Enter the text of the note and confirm its creation.

116 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Channel filtering

Press the

Exit

key to return to the previous menu if necessary.

NOTE

The table notes are not stored in the measurement results.

Displaying relative results

By default, the table gives the results in absolute values. To obtain these results in relative values with respect to a reference channel:

– Press the

Table Contents

key, then

Relative>/<Absolute

to select

Relative

– Move the cursor on to the channel that is to serve as the reference.

– Press the

Define Ref. Channel

key. The results are recalculated with respect to this channel of reference.

Channel filtering

Field of application

This option is only available for OSA-XX1 and OSA-XX3 modules.

It is used to filter out one particular channel and extract it via a port called the "drop port".

NOTE

For Dual Port OSA-201 and OSA-303 only the input port B can extract a channel to the drop port.

Configuration

To obtain filtering of a given canal to the drop port, go into the

ETUP

menu of the OSA module. Choose

Acquisition

, then

Sweeps

and select

Filtering

The options of the acquisition menu then change and offer:

Choice of channel

In the Choice of Channel option, either a value may be entered manually or the current value from the table can be taken.

– Manual: A new line appears above choice of channel, in which the required value can be entered.

User Manual 780000102/19 117

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Drift measurement

– Table: The value of the current selection in the results table is used automatically. To vary this selection, go the the result screen and use

Table contents

Channel value

Here the manual value of the filtering to be performed can be entered using the direction keys and . or the numeric keypad

Tracking

Activating the tracking function will make the internal tunable filter follow slow wavelength changes of optical sources and transmitters providing stable output power.

The information «Locked» appears as long as the channel remains within the tolerance limits of the instrument. If the channel strays outside the tolerance band, the information «Unlocked» appears.

Using channel filtering

After setting sweep mode (in the acquisition menu of the

ETUP

screen) on

Filtering

, press the

TART

TOP

button to start or stop filtering of the signal.

Drift measurement

The OSA-xxx modules provide a Drift measurement application to perform multiple measurements and display the recorded results in a graphical format (trace) over the time.

This can be used to monitor the drift of power, wavelength and SNR of optical systems or components. This is important to measure the drift of non temperature stabilized transmitter in CWDM networks.

NOTE

A Drift measurement can only be done at predefined wavelengths or frequencies, for this reason a reference Grid needs to be defined and the Channel Detection parameter is set to Grid.

The following parameters need to be set for Drift measurements:

– Number of Sweeps: defines the number of sweeps (1 to 10.000)

– Interval Defines the time between the measurements.

Similar to Wait Period of Long Term

application (see “Wait Period” on page 103

)

118 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Drift measurement

NOTE

Interval specifies the time between start of one measurement and start of the next measurement and includes the instrument measurement time

All channels defined by the channel Grid can be monitored simultaneously with the drift application. To show the monitored measurement parameter use the Trace/Channel/Drift button in the result screen.

This button has a toggle function with the following selections:

–

Trace

: in Trace mode the up/down cursor change the active trace in a multiple trace display

–

Channel

: in Channel mode the up/down cursor changes the channel to be displayed over time.

–

Drift

: activates the drift display showing the selected parameter over time

Activating the Drift display will show the following screen:

Fig. 45

Example of drift measurement, wavelength over time

In the Drift display the measurement result is shown in a graphical format

(trace over time / scans) and a tabular format. The table shows the following parameters:

– Channel number number of the displayed channel

– Wavelength or Frequency of the displayed channel

– Ref

– AVG reference value of wavelength, power or SNR average value of wavelength, power or SNR

User Manual 780000102/19 119

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

EDFA results analysis

–

Min

Max

Sdev or Delta:

Minimum of wavelength, power or SNR

Maximum of wavelength, power or SNR standard deviation or delta (Min/ max) of wavelength, power or SNR

All Zoom and Shift functions are available in Drift mode.

By using the cursor A it is possible to get access to each measured data point. The Start value as well as the actual cursor position including the time information is shown in the blue field of the table.

NOTE

If the channel power drifts to a power level below the channel detection threshold the measurement will indicate "No Signal"

EDFA results analysis

This feature applies only to instruments OSA-XXX series.

The results analysis of an EDFA consists in performing two spectrum analysis: one before the signal is amplified and another one after the signal is amplified. Both traces are further compared, providing the resulting power gain and noise figure.

EDFA test configuration

To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an EDFA test, press the

ETUP

button.

In the Measurements section, set

Type

on «EDFA».

Other

ETUP

parameters are the same for EDFA as for WDM measurements. Refer to

“OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 98 for a

complete description.

NOTE

If your Base Unit is equipped with an OSA-303, you may use the two ports to test before and after the EDFA. In this case, make sure you select «Port A+B» for

Input Port

EDFA measurements

Measurement procedure, using one port :

If only one port is selected, the Base Unit is ready to perform the «Acq.

» (signal before being amplified by EDFA).

120 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

EDFA results analysis

Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA.

Click

TART

TOP

to perform the first acquisition.

Switch to

Acq. Out

Connect your Base Unit to your fiber after the EDFA.

Click

TART

TOP

to perform the second acquisition.

Results appear automatically in the table.

Select which trace to view

Select which acquisition you are working on

Fig. 46

EDFA measurements

Measurement procedure, using two ports :

If two ports are selected, the Base Unit will perform both «Acq. In» and

«Acq. Out» in one step.

Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA on port A and your fiber after the EDFA on port B.

Click

TART

TOP

to perform both acquisitions.

Results appear automatically in the table.

EDFA results

– A table is displayed (see "EDFA measurements" p 121 ) showing for each channel:

– S. In Signal power before EDFA (expressed in dBm)

– N. In

– S. Out

Noise level before EDFA (expressed in dBm)

Signal power after EDFA (expressed in dBm)

User Manual 780000102/19 121

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

DFB results analysis

– N. Out

– Gain

– NF

Noise level after EDFA (expressed in dBm)

Power gain from EDFA (expressed in dB)

Noise figure from EDFA (expressed in dB)

<Channel> allows to move the cursor from one channel to another, both in the trace and in the table of results.

Saving EDFA results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be stored as regular WDM traces.

To save your files:

Select

Acq. In

to save the first file

Click on

ILE

, select name and

Store Trace

Click on

ESULTS

to come back to the previous screen

Proceed the same way for

Acq. Out

Loading EDFA results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be reloaded as regular WDM traces. Results will be automatically recalculated.

Select

Acq. In

before loading your first file

Click on

ILE

and

Explorer

to select your file

3 Load

and

view

your trace

The first trace is now loaded for <Acq. In>.

Select

Acq. Out

before loading the second file and proceed the same way to load the second file.

Results appear automatically in the table.

DFB results analysis

This feature only applies to instruments OSA-XXX.

DFB results analysis allows to characterize DFB lasers, by giving the corresponding SMSR, Offset and bandwidth values (see the measurement principles in

“DFB analysis” on page 6

122 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

DFB results analysis

DFB test configuration

To configure the Base Unit in preparation for a DFB test, press the

ETUP

button.

In the Measurements section, set

Type

on DFB.

A new DFB sub-menu is offered while other Setup parameters are the

same for DFB as for WDM measurements. Refer to “OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 98 for a complete description.

DFB (sub-menu)

– Bandwidth level Level (expressed in dBc) where the main component bandwidth should be calculated

– Min SMSR

– Max SMSR

Minimum offset value to consider to find the Side

Mode

Maximum offset value to consider to find the Side

Mode

DFB measurements

Measurement procedure:

Use a patchcord to connect your DFB laser source to an input port of the OSA-XXX module on the Base Unit.

Power on the DFB laser source.

Click

TART

TOP

to perform the acquisition.

The trace and corresponding results appear automatically after a few seconds.

Select which DFB you are working on

Fig. 47

DFB measurements

User Manual 780000102/19 123

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

DFB results analysis

Cursors A and B are automatically positioned on the first DFB laser, respectively on the max SMSR and the pick of the main component.

DFB results

A table is displayed (see "DFB measurements" p 123 ) showing for each

DFB:

– Channel: Number of DFB laser detected

– Wavelength: Wavelength (expressed in nm) of the DFB main component

– Level: integrated power (expressed in dBm)

– SMSR:

– Mode off:

Side Mode Suppression Ratio (expressed in dBc)

Mode Offset (expressed in nm)

– BW @ level: Calculated bandwidth (expressed in nm) according to the bandwidth level (expressed in dBc) defined in the setup menu.

When the <Channel> key is selected, use the arrow keys and to move the cursor from one DFB pick to another

, both in the trace and in the table of results.

Saving DFB results

DFB Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be stored as a regular WDM trace.

To save your files:

– Click on

ILE

, select name and

Store Trace

– Click on

ESULTS

to come back to the previous screen

Loading DFB results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be reloaded as a regular WDM trace. Make sure Type parameter is set on

DFB

in the

Setup

menu to recalculate DFB results.

Results appear automatically in the table.

124

1.In case several DFB lasers are characterized at the same time

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Testing ROADM networks

Testing ROADM networks

In ROADM networks, each channel may traverse different routes, optical amplifiers, and add-drop filters, resulting in different OSNR for each channel. Conventional OSA measurements are unreliable, as they indicate OSNR values that are too high: up to 10dB above the true OSNR.

Using the in-band OSNR method (I-OSNR) of OSA-320 or -500R will provide the true OSNR value in ROADM based networks.

Fig. 48

ROADM network test

With OSA-320 or -500R, it is possible to measure the "true" in-band

OSNR using the polarization nulling technique.

Here is a test setup for in-band OSNR testing

Example:

– OSNR measured with in-band OSA-320 or OSA-500R at terminal site (1) provides value of 14dB

– Service failed as the OSNR is < 20 dB

Fig. 49

Test setup for In-band OSNR testing

User Manual 780000102/19 125

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Measurement of I-OSNR

How to locate the failure?

Perform the following tests at EDFA monitor access points (2-5):

– Check per channel input and output power of EDFA

=> input power must be in the system specified range

– Check power uniformity

=> Equal power levels for all channels at EDFA output

– Compare OSNR from EDFA to EDFA

=> OSNR may decrease because of the amplifier noise figure NF

(type 3-4 dB) per EDFA

– Locate and exchange optical amplifier

Measurement of I-OSNR

Pre-setting the

OSA for an inband OSNR measurement in

I-OSNR mode

As the out-of-band OSNR measurements might not provide the 'TRUE'

OSNR value for the above listed systems configurations, the in-band

OSNR measurement method based on JDSUs polarization nulling technique must be selected.

Press

ETUP

until OSA test setup appears.

Press

Test Auto I-OSNR

button.

The instrument will be set for in-band OSNR measurements

126

All Parameter settings will be done automatically:

The following parameters will be pre-set:

–

Sweep mode

Sweep range single ext. C-band= 1525-1570nm, covering all

EDFA applications

– I-OSNR sensitivity needs to be set manually, see below

– Resolution full, i.e. highest resolution

– Channel detection permanent auto detection of channels & chspacing

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Measurement of I-OSNR

– Min channel spacing std 50GHz, needs to be adjusted manually, see below

– OSNR method:

– noise Acq. BW needs to be adjusted manually, see below standard 0.1nm

– SNR meas Type S/N = indicates real signal to noise measurement

Select Show I-OSNR trace: Yes

In the I-OSNR mode the polarization nulling trace can be displayed on the screen by activating the show I-OSNR trace to YES

A blue trace will then show the progress of the suppression of the polarized signal by the polarization nulling method.

Manual Settings:I-OSNR sensitivity

I-OSNR sensitivity will set the number of measurements performed for polarization nulling

–

Low (fast) mode

(<2 min measurement time)

Fast measurement with small number of polarization nulling measurements

=> can be used for a first check when expected OSNR <20dB for

10G systems at channel spacing of 50GHz and higher; and for systems running at 40GBps at channel spacing of 100GHz or higher

–

Medium mode

(<5min measurement time)

Polarization nulling will be performed at about 3 times more measurement points than fast mode

=> to be used when expected OSNR is in the range of 20-25dB for

10G systems at channel spacing of 50GHz and higher; and for systems running at 40GBps at channel spacing of 100GHz or higher.

–

High mode

(<11min measurement time)

Polarization nulling will be performed at about 3 times more points than in medium mode

=> to be used when expected OSNR is >25dB and for all systems running at 40/100GBps at channel spacing of 50GHz

User Manual 780000102/19 127

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Measurement of I-OSNR

Manual Settings: Min Channel Spacing

Min channel spacing needs to be set according to the minimum present channel spacing in a system

NOTE

The preset min ch-spacing is 50GHz, which works for most of the systems, nevertheless the operator needs to enter the effective minimum system channel spacing of the WDM system. This is important for a correct approximation of the noise distribution inside the transmission band of the WDM channels.

128

Example 1

: only every second channel is loaded, system looks like

100GHz ch-spacing

It might be that the system has a visible channel spacing of 100GHz but the min channel spacing is 50GHz as only every second channel is loaded. This could also be the case when 50GHz optical interleavers are used to multiplex two 100GHz spaced WDM signals

(even and odd channels) together into a 50GHz spaced system

=> min-ch-spacing needs to be set to 50GHz

Example 2

: submarine links

Submarine links often pack 3 channels into the ITU-T 100GHz grid

=> min-ch-spacing needs to be set to 33GHz

Manual Settings: OSNR method

The OSNR method can be set according to the application.

–

ROADM networks

: networks with optical filters in the link:

Set OSNR method to 'filtered' (=pre-set)

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

Measurement of I-OSNR

In-band noise approximation will be done automatically to match the in-band noise distribution of the measured filter shape, whatever shape it is: flat top or rounded

=> set OSNR method to 'filtered'

–

Overlapping spectra

: systems with Overlapping spectra, having no filter in the link (e.g. submarine links or 40/100G links at 50GHz channel spacing)

=> set OSNR method to 'unfiltered'

In-band noise will be approximated as a flat distribution.

Performing an in-band OSNR test in I-OSNR mode

In the I-OSNR mode the instrument performs multiple scans for one measurement. During each scan the polarization controller will change its setting to adopt to the input signal for a maximum suppression of the signal to get access to the in-band noise.

Start the measurement by pushing the

TART

STOP

button

A green on top of the WDM table will show the progress of the measurement.

When the measurement is finished the green bar disappears and the result is shown in the table.

Fig. 50

Result trace of an I-OSNR measurement

The table will show the following results:

– Wavelen/Freq: will be displayed in nm or in THz

– Spacing: channel spacing in THz

– Level: total integrated channel power in dBm

User Manual 780000102/19 129

Chapter 7

Optical Spectrum Measurement

File Management

– Noise: in-band noise power normalized to 0.1nm noise bandwidth

– I-OSNR: in-band OSNR measured Gaussian or no Filter appriximation

File Management

Storing OSA measurements

If Auto store has been selected, then results will be saved automatically.



If not, or if you want to save the results under another name, directory etc.:

Click on

ILE

key

Select

Setup

with the

Setup/Explorer

key

Modify the parameters you want

Click on

Store Trace

The trace is saved with the extension ".OSA"

Recalling OSA files

Once an OSA file has been stored, recall it using the

Explorer

Select

Explorer

with the key

Setup/Explorer

Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

Click on

Load

Click on

View Tace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see

Chapter 14 “File management” .

130 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion

Measurement

This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a PMD measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a a 81PMD / 81DISPAP /

81MRDISPAP Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

"Recommended equipment" on page 132

–

"PMD Activation and self calibration" on page 132

–

"Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module" on page 137

–

"Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module" on page 137

–

“Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement” on page 139

–

"Display of results" on page 143

–

"Statistics results" on page 145

–

“File Management” on page 147

–

"PMD standards and limits" on page 147

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit, the

OBS-5XX (Optical Broadband Source) or 81BBSxx (BroadBand Source)

User Manual 780000102/19 131

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Recommended equipment

Recommended equipment

To perform a PMD measurement, the following equipment is recommended:

– Base Unit with a module as mentioned above, and associated optical connectors.

– OBS-5XX Optical Broadband Source, or 81BBS1A and 81BBS2A

Optical broadband source modules.

– Fiber inspection scope with associated optical connector tips.

– Cleaning kit.

– Two fiber patchcords with required optical connectors.

NOTE

Method used to measure the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) is described in the Reference Guide to Fiber Optic Testing - Vol2.

NOTE

The PMD value obtained by the fixe analyzer method is the mean

DGD value, also designated as «PMD value».

PMD Activation and self calibration

Select the

PMD

function in the Instrument

YSTEM

menu. To do this, press the

YSTEM

button, then select the

PMD

function, and press the key .

132

Fig. 51

PMD icon selected

Press the button

ESULTS

to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph

tuning in progress

informs of the progression status of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

PMD Activation and self calibration

Press the button

ETUP

to access to the configuration menu for

PMD. Use the keys and to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys and to modify a value.

Setup menu

To access the PMD test setup menu, press the

ETUP

button on the

Base Unit. The different measurement parameters are displayed.

You can choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key or define your own configuration. .

Test Auto

Configuration

In Test Auto configuration, the setups below are provided.

Setup menu

ACQUISITION

– Sweep

: Single

– Averaging acquisition: Auto

– Make reference : No

– Reference date

– Long term: No

MEASURES

– Coupling : Strong

File Menu

– Filenaming: Auto : [Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Direction]

– Autostore: Yes

– Fiber Nbr Increment: Yes

Manual Mode

Configuration

In manual mode, you can set your own parameters.

1.Does not apply with 81DISPAP/81MRDISPAP modules used with a PSM

2.For use with PSM module only in High Resolution PMD mode.

User Manual 780000102/19 133

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

PMD Activation and self calibration

134

Fig. 52

PMD Test setup menu (Expert Mode)

NOTE

The key Copy Setup For AP/CD allows to apply the PMD configuration to the other selected function(s) of the 81DISPAP or

81MRDISPAP module.

Acquisition parameters

NOTE

When the composite power of the input signal is higher than

+20 dBm, a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off.

Acquisition band

(only available with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL

SCL

Acquisition will be performed on the full band.

Acquisition will only be performed on S, C and L bands.

Sweep

(Not available when used with the Polarisation scrambler

Module in High Resolution PMD mode)

Continue

Single

Statistics

Continuous measurement with a trace refresh and a real-time display of the results.

Single measurement with associated results displayed.

A set of measurements can be performed providing result statistics. This mode also gives access to the following parameters: Long Term and Number of sweeps.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

PMD Activation and self calibration

High Dynamic

Auto

Yes

The Dynamic range is automatically selected

High dynamic mode is not used for measurement

High dynamic mode is selected for measurement

Averaging acquisition

It enables to improve the dynamic range of the measurement by reducing the noise level. It is recommended to use the Auto mode and configure a manual averaging if needed only.

Low

Medium

High

Auto

No averaging of the acquisition sample.

Low averaging (4 samples).

Medium averaging (16 samples).

High averaging (32 samples).

Averaging automatically selected.

NOTE

An increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range.

Power Check

–

: No receive power level indication.

–

Yes

: Receive power level is indicated in bar graph.

NOTE

When Yes selected, acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

Make zero

(Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in

High Resolution PMD mode)

It enables to perform the reference of the 81BBS1A broadband source module before a measurement (see

"Performing the reference" on page 140

Last zero

(Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in

High Resolution PMD mode)

This parameter displays the date and time of the last reference.

Number of sweeps

(not available when used with the Polarization scrambler module in High Resolution PMD mode)

Number of acquisitions from 2 to 1000.

User Manual 780000102/19 135

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

PMD Activation and self calibration

Long term

(Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in

High Resolution PMD mode)

Enables to repeat the measurement defined by the number of sweeps, over a given period and to obtain staistical results:

None

Manual:

Period: samples are displayed one after the other; requires the user to press the

Stop Wait

button to start the next sample.

Defines time between 2 samples. To be configured with wait period parameter..

Wait Period

The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a time between 2 acquisition samples (only active if Long Term is positioned on

Period

)

– Increments of 5 seconds to 24 hours.

Measurement parameters

Known Length

Yes

If you do not know the fiber length

If you know the fiber length

Fiber length

Press Edit Number to enter fiber distance: Min=0.100 km / Max=20000 km

The fiber length must be set to calculate the PMD coefficient.

Distance Unit

When the fiber length is manually entered, choose the distance unit

Kfeet

Miles

Distance unit defined in kilometers.

Distance unit defined in kilofeet.

Distance unit defined in miles.

Coupling

Strong

Weak

For standard singlemode fibers

For polarization-maintained fibers and components.

If the softkey PMD is set to Standard mode, any measurement will be set to the strong mode Coupling and the wavelength range to Auto.

136 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module

The Expert mode is to be used with measurement through EDFA. When selected, the Expert mode allows to set the wavelength range.

Measurement Band

Auto / C Band / L Band / C+ L Band / Manual



When Manual is selected, the Measurement Start and End must be set

(in nm).

Results Screen parameters

Alarms

None

Active

No Pass/Fail thresholds selected.

Pass/Fail analysis will be made upon defined thresholds: auto values or delay.

Auto Values

Yes

Threshold values entered manually.

Threshold values automatically calculated according to the bit rate info selection.

Bit rate info.

This table provides the PMD thresholds according to the transmission bit rate. Use the direction keys and for selection.

Delay

PMD Delay Maximum allowable delay.

PMD Coeff.

Maximum allowable PMD coefficient.

PMD2 Delay Maximum allowable second order PMD delay (Only if

Coupling

is set to Strong)

PMD2 Coeff. Maximum allowable second order PMD coefficient (Only if Coupling is set to Strong)

Delay and coefficient values for PMD and PMD2 can be modified with the directions keys or using the

Edit Number

key.

Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module

The following modules apply:

– E81PMD

– E81DISPAP

User Manual 780000102/19 137

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module

– E81MRDISPAP

Handheld or module broadband sources can be used to perform PMD measurements:

– OBS-55

– OBS-500

– OBS-550

– 81BBS1A

– 81BBS2A

The following procedure considers the use of an OBS-5xx type source.

Remote operator

Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC 61300-3-35

Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the broadband source using required mating solution such as a fiber patchcord.

Press the source.

button to switch on the OBS-5XX broadband

Press Laser On/Off of the OBS-55 or the "Active" button of the

OBS-5x0 to activate the source transmission.

Note

Make sure the test mode is set to "PMD" when using the OBS-500 or

OBS-550

Local operator

Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC 61300-3-35

Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the test module using required mating solution such as a fiber patchcord, as

shown in Figure 53

Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu and wait for the module self calibration (tuning).

Press the

ETUP

button to access the PMDTest Setup menu.

Select the appropriate PMD parameters according to your application as defined earlier in this chapter.

Press the

TART

TOP

button and wait for the results to be displayed.

138 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

fiber patchcords

Fiber under test

Optical connector of the 81DISPAP/

81MRDISPAP module

OBS-5XX

Fig. 53

PMD measurement with an ODM plug-in

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

The HR PMD measurement requires a polarization scrambler module (PSM) to be connected to the PMD module, and the use of the 81BBS1A broadband source module at the other end of the fiber under test.

Selecting the

HR-PMD function

Press the

YSTEM

button

On the System page, select the HR-PMD icon of the PSM module.

The PMD icon will then be selected automatically.

Press to validate each function.

User Manual 780000102/19 139

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

Fig. 54

HR-PMD and PMD icons selected

Performing the reference

It is mandatory to perform a PMD reference prior to the first measurement.

To perform a reference, connect your Broadband source 81BBS1A to the PSM module as shown below:

Coupler

Jumper

Signal input connector on the PSM module

81BBS1A in 8000 or 6000 Base-Unit

PSM module in 8000 Base-

Unit

Fig. 55

Interconnection of 81BBS1A and PSM modules

Press the

ESULTS

hardkey. A bargraph informs of the progression status of the module self-calibration. Wait for completion before continuing

On the BBS Results tab, select Source On, enter safety password

4877

, and select PMD/AP function using the soft key.

140

Fig. 56

BBS activation

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

Go to the PMD Setup page, and press the Acq. Ref. softkey.

NOTE

If the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module with the HR function is used for the first time, pressing the

ETUP

button directly open the

Reference Setup page.

Set the parameter

Make Zero

Yes

in the configuration menu.

NOTE

When performing a PMD reference, acquisition parameters are not taken in account, except for averaging.

Press the button

TART

TOP

to start referencing of the broadband source

NOTE

Performing a reference measurement can take several minutes (minimum 2 min 30)

Resulting reference will then be displayed and message "ready to measure" confirms the reference is valid.

Fig. 57

Example of a PMD reference result

User Manual 780000102/19 141

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following points:

Error message

Acquisition impossible

Hit any key to continue

Signal level too low !

Check source and connections

Hit any key to continue

Possible problem Possible solution

Auto-calibration is not completed

Wait for the calibration to be terminated

The 81BBS1A is not switched on

The 81BBS1A battery is too low

Press the

button to switch on the 81BBS1A, check if

Make reference

is still set to

Yes

, then repeat step 6

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the battery.

Defective connections Check that the cables are properly connected, and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned.

Performing the measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, use the following procedure to start testing:

Press the

ETUP

button to access the PMD configuration menu

Select the appropriate PMD test parameters according to your application as earlier defined in this chapter.

Press the

TART

TOP

button to start measuring.

Fiber under test fiber patchcords

Jumper

81BBS1A

Fig. 58

PSM module

Signal input connector on the 81DISPAP or

81MRDISPAP module

HR PMD measurement with a Polarization

Scrambler Module (PSM), a 81DISPAP/

81MRDISPAP module and a 81BB1A module

142 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Display of results

Display of results

Spectrum/FFT menu key

The key

Spectrum / FFT

enables you to display:

– The spectrum representing the power (in dBm) according to the frequency (in THz) or wavelength (in nm).

– The FFT curve and PMD information (delay & coefficient) according to the Fast Fourier Transform Method. The FFT trace represents the

PMD delay in ps.

Display of PMD results

The PMD results screen is split in 3 main areas. from top to bottom::

– The information bar with:

– module reference

– number of acquisitions used for the statistics (Acq)

– wavelength range (1525-1610),

– fiber number (N:)

– fiber length in defined unit

– date and time of acquisition.

– file name (if result stored in memory)

– Pass/fail indication

– The FFT curve and its gaussian shape (for strong mode coupling only).

– the table of results: PMD delay and coefficient, second order PMD

(PMD2) delay and coefficient. This table is different if statistic

measurement is selected (see "Sweep (Not available when used with the Polarisation scrambler Module in High Resolution PMD mode)" on page 134 ).

The results are displayed in black when no alarm is defined, in green if alarms are within the threshold defined in the Setup menu and in red if the alarms exceed the thresholds defined.

User Manual 780000102/19 143

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Display of results

Fiber

Length

Number of acquisitions

Coupling Cable Identification File Name Alarm indicator

Spectrum/

FFT

144

PMD delay

Fig. 59

second order

PMD delay

Example of PMD result second order PMD coefficient

PMD

Coefficient

NOTE

When several acquisitions are performed, the trace resulting from the last acquisition is displayed.

Cursor

To move the cursor(s) on the trace, press soft key

Cursor A / Cursor B

menu key, then use the direction arrow keys and or and

.

The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated underneath the trace:

Zoom access, in spectrum display

In order to zoom in on the trace, press the

Zoom/Shift

menu key to display

Zoom

, then use the direction arrow keys to zoom in either horizontally or vertically.

The zoom is made around the selected cursor(s).

NOTE

To reset the zoom and see the full trace, press

Full scale

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Statistics results

Trace shift access, in spectrum display

To shift the trace horizontally or vertically, press the

Zoom/Shift

soft key, then use the direction arrow keys to make the required shift.

Statistics results

Statistics can be performed on a series of samples defined by the number of samples and the time between two consecutive samples (Wait period). Refer to

"Acquisition parameters" on page 134 for parameter

setup.

To display the statistic results press the

ESULTS

button.

Table of results

Current value, average value, min value, max. value and standard deviation (Sdev) are provided in the table for each of the 4 parameters: PMD delay, PMD coefficient, second order PMD delay and second order PMD coefficient. The statistic results are automatically updated with each acquisition.

Graphics display

When Statistic mode is selected, the button

Spectrum/FFT

becomes

Spectrum/FFT/Drift/Barchart

This button allows therefore to display alternatively:

– Delay drift during the acquisition time

Fig. 60

Example of drift

In Drift mode, the cursor can be moved on each measurement by clicking on the key Previous Acq. or Next Acq..

– The histogram providing the delay value for each acquisition

User Manual 780000102/19 145

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

Statistics results

146

Fig. 61

Example of histogram

Information messages

Under the trace, at the right-hand corner a message indicates the current status of the trace or proposes to start next acquisition (by clicking on

Stop wait

Signal acquisition

This message indicates that an acquisition is in progress.

To stop an acquisition, whatever the mode is used, press the

TART

TOP

button.

Next measurement

After each acquisition in the

Statistic

mode and when

Long term

has bee set on

Period

Manual

, this message requests that you select

S top Wait

. The Base Unit then displays Signal Acquisition.

Ready to start test cycle

This message appears after a acquisition cycle is finished, when you are in statistic mode. Press

TART

TOP

to start a new cycle.

Ready to start Measurement

The message is displayed after the completion of an acquisition sample or a Reference measurement..

Waiting bargraph

When

Statistic

mode is used and

Long term

is set to

Period

, a bargraph displays, the remaining time before the next acquisition.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

File Management

File Management

Saving PMD results

If Auto store is selected, results are saved automatically.



If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

Click on the

ILE

key

Select

Setup

with the key

Setup/Explorer

Modify the file parameters

Click on

Store Trace

The PMD traces are stored with the extension ".PMD".

Recalling PMD files

Once a PMD file has been stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:

Select

Explorer

with the key

Setup/Explorer

Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

Press the

Load

soft key.

Press

View Trace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management” .

PMD standards and limits

Some organizations and standards are stating that 10% of the bit rate for the PMD delay can be tolerated for a system without disturbing the network performance by more than 1 dB loss, at 1550 nm, with NRZ coding:

Bit Rate Per Channel SDH SONET Equivalent Time-slot PMD Delay Limit

2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 401 ps 40 ps

10 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

STM-64 OC-192 100 ps

STM-256 OC-768 25.12 ps

10 ps

2.5 ps

10G Ethernet Ethernet 5 ps

User Manual 780000102/19 147

Chapter 8

Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

PMD standards and limits

148 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a Attenuation

Profile (AP) measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a 81DISPAP or 81 MRDISPAPModule.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

"Recommended equipment" on page 150

–

"AP Activation and self calibration" on page 150

–

"AP Reference Measurement" on page 154

–

"Performing a AP measurement" on page 157

–

"Display of AP results" on page 158

–

“File Management” on page 160

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit and the Optical Broadband Source you are using.

User Manual 780000102/19 149

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

Recommended equipment

Recommended equipment

To perform a AP measurement, the following equipment is recommended:

– Base Unit with a module as referenced above, and required optical connector.

– OBS-5XX,the BBS1A or BBS2A with required optical connectors.

– Fiber inspection scope with associated optical connector tips.

– Cleaning kit.

– Two fiber patchcords with required optical connectors.

– One mating adapter.

AP Activation and self calibration

Select the

function in the Instrument

YSTEM

menu. To do this, press the

YSTEM

button, then select the

function, and press the key .

150

Fig. 62

AP icon selected

Press the button

ESULTS

to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph

tuning in progress

informs of the progression status of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

Press the button

ETUP

to access to the configuration menu for

Spectrum analysis. Use the keys and to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys and to modify a value.

Setup Menu

The different test and display parameters are described below:

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Activation and self calibration

NOTE

The key Copy Setup For PMD/CD allows to apply the AP configuration to the other selected function(s) of the module.

Fig. 63

Configuration menu for AP test

Test Auto configuration

The Test Auto soft key sets all parameteres to auto or default values and let the unit to choose the apropriate setup, as listed below.

Setup Menu

Acquisition:

– Averaging acquisition: No

Results Screen:

– Wavelength range: full

– Normalized to km: No

File menu

– File naming: Auto

– Auto store: Yes

– Fiber Nb Increment: Yes

standard

mode, you can set the parameters below.

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition band

(with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL

SCL measurement performed over the full wavelength range

(OESCL bands). measurement performed over a wavelength range limited to S,C and L bands

User Manual 780000102/19 151

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Activation and self calibration

NOTE

In case of OBS5xx handheld sources, the measurement will be performed exclusively on SCL band

Averaging acquisition

It enables to improve the dynamic range of the measurement by reducing the noise level. It is recommended to use the Auto mode and configure a manual averaging if needed only.:

Low

Medium

High

No average of the acquisition sample to be performed.

Low averaging (4 samples).

Medium averaging (16 samples).

High averaging (32 samples).

Power Check

This parametyer enables to get a power level indication at the start of an acquisisition (only with 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP modules)

Yes

the received power is not indicated before starting the measurement acquisition.

the received power is indicated at the beginning of measurement.

NOTE

If Yes is selected, the acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

Last Reference /

BBS Type / BBS

Serial Number

These parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broadband source (BBS) referencing.

These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically gener-

ated after a reference measurement (see "Performing the reference" on page 154 )

Measurements

Known Length

A know fiber length enables to calculate and display the attenuation profile values in dB/km, in the table. (see

Figure 69 on page 158 ).

Yes

If you do not know the fiber length, select No

If you know the fiber length, select Yes.

152 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Activation and self calibration

Fiber length

If Yes has been selected on the previous line, click on Edit number to use the numeric keypad, or use the direction keys, to modify the fiber length (Min = 0.100 km / Max = 300 km).

Unit

Select the distance unit: km / kfeet / miles.

Results Screen

Wavelength Range

It enables to configure the range of wavelengths to be displayed on the graph and in the table of results.

Full

Displays results along the full available wavelength range

S+C+L Band

Displays results along S, C + L bands.

C+L Band

Displays results along C + L bands.

Manual

Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths.

The user must then select the <start> and <end> wavelengths.

ITUCWDM

ITUDWDM

Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclusively

Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclusively

Channel spacing can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200 GHz.

Telecom

Displays 4 wavelengths: 1310 / 1480 / 1550 / 1625 nm

Inc.Wavelength

Defines the spacing between 2 consecutive measurement points displayed on the graph and in the table of results..

Normalized to km

The AP result is provided in dB only.

Yes

The AP result is also provided in dB/km (calculated according to fiber length).

User Manual 780000102/19 153

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Reference Measurement

AP Reference Measurement

On the measurement examples below, only the OBS-5XX is described.

However, it can be replaced by E81BBSXX.

Performing the reference

It is recommended to perform a broadband source referencing once a day or each time the fiber patchcord has to be changed.

NOTE

When a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in account.

To make a reference, connect your OBS-5XX or BBS to the test module just like shown on figure below.

Fiber patchcord

Mating adapter

OBS-5XX

Fiber patchcord

Signal input connector of the 81DISPAP or 81

MRDISPAP module

Fig. 64

Reference measurement setup

Activate the source on the distant Unit, and select AP function.

154

Fig. 65

OBS-5XX module

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Reference Measurement

In the AP Setup page, press the

Acq. Ref

. sofkey.

Fig. 66

AP Reference Setup

Make Reference

, select

Yes

using the direction keys and

The line BBS Serial Number turns active.

Enter a serial number for the broadband source used.

Press the button

TART

TOP

to start the reference of the broadband source.

To display the results, press the

ESULTS

button. Once the reference is correct, the message "ready to measure" appears in the blue bar.

Fig. 67

Example of a reference for a broadband source

A bargraph indicates the source power level

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following potential causes:

User Manual 780000102/19 155

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

AP Reference Measurement

Error message

Acquisition impossible

Hit any key to continue

Signal level too low !

Check source and connections.

Hit any key to continue.

Possible problem

Auto-calibration is not completed

The OBS-5XX (or other source) is not switched on

The OBS-5XX (or other source) battery is too low

Defective connections

Possible solution

Wait for the calibration to be terminated

Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the source, verify if <Make reference> is

still set to <Yes>, then repeat step 5

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the battery.

Check that the cables are properly connected, and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned.

Saving a reference measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, you can save the result on the hardidsk or disk of the Base

Unit (8000 or 6000 Platform).



Proceed as follow:

Click on the

ILE

button

Select

Setup

Enter a filename for this reference, or click on Default Filename.

The file has the extension ".AP", but differs from the AP measurement result files as it only contains the reference points (the information on the upper part of the screen are different). See

"Saving

Attenuation Profile measurements" on page 160

Loading existing reference

The last reference performed with the Base Unit may be different than the reference used by the current curve.

In this case, the Acquisition Ref. menu will be different than the Curve

Menu, in the Reference setup page.

156

Fig. 68

Acquisition Reference and Curve Reference

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

Performing a AP measurement

You can replace one reference by the other, using specific softkeys:

Load Ref From Trace

: the reference which has been used for the curve actually open will be used for the next acquisitions.

- Update Trace With Ref.: apply the acquisition reference parameters to the loaded curve.

Performing a AP measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, use the following procedure to make a measurement:

Disconnect the mating adapter and connect each fiber patchcord to the end of the fiber under test.

Press the

ETUP

button to access the configuration menu.

Select the appropriate AP test setup according to your application

as earlier defined in "AP Activation and self calibration" on page

150 .

Press the

TART

TOP

button to see the results within a few seconds.

Repeat step 1 to 4 for every fiber to be tested.

NOTE

When the composite power of the input signal is higher than +20 dBm, a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off.

Fiber under test

Fiber patchcord

OBS-5XX

Signal input connector on the 81DISPAP or 81

MRDISPAP module

NOTE

You can modify the fiber length without performing a measurement again. The AP results (dB/km) will be recalculated automatically.

User Manual 780000102/19 157

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

Display of AP results

Display of AP results

The AP results screen presents different zones (see:

"Example of a AP result" on page 158 ).

Trace display

Wavelength range

Fiber Length

File name

Attenuation profil Curve

Results table

Fig. 69

Example of a AP result

Spectrum/Profile

For a reference measurement, only the spectrum is available.

For a AP measurement, two different graphs may be displayed.

You may switch from the «Profile» view to the final «Spectrum» view using the button

Spectrum/Profile.

It shows the final spectrum.

158 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

Display of AP results

Fig. 70

Example of a spectrum view after a measurement

Profile: it provides the difference between the final spectrum and the reference spectrum of the broadband source- that’s the resulting attenu-

ation profile (see figure "Example of a AP result" on page 158

NOTE

For a reference measurement, only the spectrum is available.

NOTE

The

Trace - Table

and

Wavelength

functions are available exclusively with the Profile mode.

Zoom

In order to zoom in on the trace, press the

Zoom/Shift

menu key to select

Zoom

, then use the arrow keys to zoom horizontally or vertically.

The zooming area is defined by the selected cursor(s).

NOTE

To reset the zoom and see the full trace, press

Full scale

Trace shift

To shift the trace horizontally or vertically, press the

Zoom/Shift

menu key to select

Shift

, then use the arrow keys to make the required shift.

User Manual 780000102/19 159

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

File Management

Cursor

To move the cursor(s) on the trace, press the

Cursor

menu key, then use the arrow keys and or and

. The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated above the graph area.

Wavelength

To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one, press the

Wavelength

key and use the arrow keys and or and . The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table (if the trace and/or the results table is displayed).

Results table

Trace/Table

Enables to display the trace and/or the results table.

8 lines of the results can be displayed below the trace, or 20 lines with no trace.

The results table provides, for each wavelength (calculated using the wavelength range and the incrementation parameter as seen in "Wavelength Range" on page 153 ), the attenuation profile in dB/km and the total loss in dB.

File Management

Saving

Attenuation

Profile measurements

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automatically.



If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

Press the

ILE

key

Select

Setup

with the soft key

Setup/Explorer

Modify the parameters you want

Press

Store Trace

Attenuation Profile traces are stored with the extension ".ats".

160

Recalling AP files

Once an AP file is stored, use the Explorer to reload it:

Select

Explorer

with the key

Setup/Explorer

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

File Management

Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

Click on

Load

Click on

View Tace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management” .

User Manual 780000102/19 161

Chapter 9

Attenuation profile

File Management

162 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function using phase shift method is available through the 81DISPAP, 81MRDISPAP and 81CD modules and is described in this chapter.

Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

"CD activation and self calibration" on page 164

–

"Configuring the CD test" on page 164

–

"CD Reference measurement" on page 169

–

"Performing a CD Measurement" on page 172

–

"Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers" on page 173

–

“Display of CD results” on page 174

–

"File Management" on page 176

User Manual 780000102/19 163

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

CD activation and self calibration

CD activation and self calibration

Select the

function in the Instrument

YSTEM

menu. To do this, press the

YSTEM

button, then select the

function, and press the key .

Fig. 71

CD icon selected

Press the button

ESULTS

to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph

tuning in progress

informs of the progression status of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

Press the button

ETUP

to access to the configuration menu for

Chromatic Dispersion analysis. Use the keys and to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys and to modify a value.

Configuring the CD test

To configure a chromatic dispersion test, press the

ETUP

button. The different measurement parameters are displayed.

You can choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key or define your own configuration.

NOTE

The key Copy Setup For PMD/AP allows to apply the CD configuration to the other selected function(s) of the 81XXX module.

164

Test Auto

Configuration:

In Test Auto configuration, the setups below are provided.

Setup menu

MEASUREMENT

Known Length No

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Configuring the CD test

Approximation formula

Amplified Link:

RESULTS SCREEN

Normalized to km Yes

Show Measured points No

Show Fit Formula No

Auto chooses the best formula depending on the acquisition band

Sellmeier 5T if the 81XXX module is used with a BBS2A on the OESCL band

Quadratic when the 81XXX modules are operating on the SCL bands.

No (refer to "Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers" on page 173

)

Storage parameters (see

Chapter 14 “File management”

– Auto Store: Yes

– Increment Fiber Number: Yes

Manual Mode

Configuration

In manual mode, you can set your own parameters.

To define your own configuration, choose the parameter to be modified, using the direction keys, then choose the option for this parameter with the keys and .

Fig. 72

Configuration of CD test

The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below.

User Manual 780000102/19 165

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Configuring the CD test

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition band

(with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL

SCL measurement performed over the full wavelength range (OESCL bands).

measurement performed over a wavelength range limited to S,C and L bands.

NOTE

In cas e of OBS5xx handheld sources, the measurement will be performed exclusively on SCL band

Power Check

This parametyer enables to get a power level indication at the start of an acquisisition (only with 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP modules).

Yes

the received power is not indicated before starting the measurement acquisition.

the received power is indicated at the beginning of measurement.

NOTE

If Yes is selected, the acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

Last Reference /

BBS Type / BBS

Serial Number

These parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broadband source (BBS) referencing.

These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically generated after a reference measurement (see

"CD Reference measurement" on page 169 ).

Measurements parameters

Known Length

Yes

If you do not know the fiber length, select No

If you know the fiber length, select Yes.

Fiber Length

If Yes is selected in the preceeding parameter, enter here the fiber length: Min.: 1 km / Max: 20000 km.



Dispersion coefficients (normalized values) will be calculated accordingly.

166 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Configuring the CD test

Distance Unit

When the fiber length is set manually, choose the distance unit: km / kfeet

/ miles.

Approx. formula

Select the approximation formula to be used for generation of the delay, dispersion and slope curves:

Please refer to ITU-T G.650.1 or IEC 60793 1-42 for further information.

Quadratic

A+B

+C

Sellmeier 3-term

A+B





Sellmeier 5-term

A+B



-2



-4

Lambda Log

A+B

+Cln().

See "Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone" on page 11

You can also let the product to configure automatically the approximation formula to be used by selecting Auto.

It is recommended to select the quadratic formula when the

81XXX,Module is used with an OBS-5XX, a 81BBS1A or a

81BBS2A, in SCL mode.

Amplified link

Selet Yes when measuring through optical amplifiers (see “Performing a

CD measurement through amplifiers” on page 173

)

Results Screen parameters

Alarms

None

Active

No alarm management.

Enable the Pass/Fail evaluation according to the defined thresholds (see below).

Auto Values: Yes

The maximum dispersion tolerance is automatically set according to the bit rate information.

User Manual 780000102/19 167

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Configuring the CD test

Bit rate info.

List all relevant data rates, . Use the direction arrow keys

Auto values: No

Threshold value is entered manually: select the maximum dispersion threshold (ps/nm): from -1 to < 10000 ps/nm.

NOTE

Max. dispersion threshold is always considered for non normalized dispersion values.

The Pass/Fail indication is provided in the results table.

Wavelength Range Mode

This parameter enables to set the displayed wavelength range.

Full

Displays results along the full available wavelength range

Displays results along S, C + L bands..

S+C+L Band

C+L Band

C Band

ITUCWDM

ITUDWDM

Displays results along C + L bands.

Displays results along C band

Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclusively

Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclusively

Channel spacing can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200

GHz.

Manual

Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths. The user must then select the inf. wavelength to "start” with and the sup. wavelength to

"end" with.

Normalized to km

Yes

Only Dispersion results of the link are displayed, in ps/nm.

In addition to dispersion results, dispersion coefficient are calculated according to the fiber length and listed in the table.

168

Show Measured

Points

Displays the acquisition points on the Delay curve (represented by black crosses).

User Manual 780000102/19

Yes

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

CD Reference measurement

All the acquisition points are displayed.

No acquisition points visible

Show Fit Formula

Displays the resulting approximation equation and the correlation coefficient on the upper left side of the trace.

Yes

Equation is displayed.

Equation is not visible.

CD Reference measurement

On the measurement examples below, only the OBS-5XX will be described. However, it can be replaced by E81BBSXX

Performing the reference

It is recommended performing a CD referencing once a day or each time the fiber patchcord has to be changed.

NOTE

When a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in account.

To perform a reference, connect your OBS-5XX or BBSto the test module as shown below.

Mating adapter

Fiber patchcord

Signal input onnector of the 81DISPAP or 81

MRDISPAP module

Fig. 73

Reference measurement setup

Activate the source on the distant Unit., and select CD function.

User Manual 780000102/19 169

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

CD Reference measurement

Fig. 74

OBS-5XX module

In the CD Setup page, press the

Acq. Ref

. sofkey.

If 81XXX module with CD function is used for the first time, clicking on the

ETUP

button directly opens the Reference setup page.

170

Fig. 75

Setup CD Reference Measurement

Make Reference

, select

Yes

using the direction keys and

The line BBS Serial Number turns active.

Enter a serial number for the broadband source used.

Press the button band source.

TART

TOP

to start the reference of the broad-

A bargraph as this one end of the acquisition.

is displayed until the

Once the reference is correct, the message Valid Reference is displayed in green, and related information are displayed in the upper blue part of the screen: date and time of reference acquisition

/ Source type / serial number.

User Manual 780000102/19

Reference information

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

CD Reference measurement

Reference validity

Fig. 76

Example of a correct reference with measured points displayed

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following points:

Error message

Acquisition impossible

Hit any key to continue

Signal level too low !

Check source and connections

Hit any key to continue

Possible problem

Auto-calibration is not completed

The source is not switched on

The Source battery is too low

Defective connections



The CD mode has not been selected on the source

Possible solution

Wait for the calibration to be completed

Press the Source ON/ Source

OFF button to switch on the source, verify if

Make reference

is still set to

Yes

, then repeat step 3

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the battery.

Check that the cables are properly connected, and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned.

Saving a reference measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, you can save the result on the hardidsk or disk of the Base

Unit used (8000 or 6000 Platform).

Proceed as follow:

Click on the

ILE

button

Select

Setup

Enter a filename for this reference, or click on Default Filename.

User Manual 780000102/19 171

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Performing a CD Measurement

The file has the extension ".OCD", but differs from the CD measurement result files as it only contains the reference points (the information on the upper part of the screen are different). See

"Storing CD measurements" on page 176

Loading existing reference

The last reference acquisition performed with the Base Unit may be different than the reference used by the curve one.

In this case, the Acquisition Ref. menu will be different than the Curve

Menu, in the Reference setup page.

Fig. 77

Acquisition Reference and Curve Reference

You can replace one reference by the other, using specific softkeys:

Load Ref From Trace

: the reference which has been used for the curve actually open will be used for the next acquisitions.

- Update Trace With Ref.: apply the reference parameters to the loaded curve.

Performing a CD Measurement

Once the reference measurement is correctly performed:

Disconnect the mating sadapter and connect each fiber patchcord to the end of the fiber under test

Press the

ETUP

button to access the CD configuration menu.

Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application

as earlier defined in "CD activation and self calibration" on page

164 .

Press the seconds.

TART

TOP

button to see the results within a few

Repeat step 1 to 4 for every fiber to be tested

172 User Manual 780000102/19

OBS-5XX

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers

Fiber under test

Fiber patchcord

Fig. 78

Signal input connector of the CD module

Connections for the CD Measurement

NOTE

You can modify the fiber length without performing a measurement again. The CD results (dB/km) will be recalculated automatically.

Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers

The CD reference step is not required for measuring through amplifiers:

Connect the source and the 81DISPAP/81MRDISPAP module at each end of the fiber under test. Optical attenuators (OLA55 1 and

OLA55 2) have to be positioned before and after the amplified link.

JDSU recommends to:

– setup the front attenuator (OLA55 #1) so that the power level received by the amplifier is 10 dB lower than the in-service power level (in normal operation).

– setup the far end attenuator (OLA55 #2) so that the maximum received power level by the CD tester is -10dBm max

81BBSXX or

OBS-5XX

Amplified Network

OLA55 #2

81DISPAP or

OLA55 #1

Psource=Pi - 10dB

81MRDISPAP

Ptester=- 10dBm max

Press the

ETUP

button to access the CD configuration menu.

Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application

as earlier defined in “Configuring the CD test” on page 164 .

User Manual 780000102/19 173

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Display of CD results

Select Yes for Amplified link (It will limit the acquisition band from

1530 nm to 1565 nm).

Press the

TART

TOP

button to perform CD measurement.

NOTE

Depending on the amplifier specification, it may be required to adjust the acqusition band to a short wavelength range.

Display of CD results

Once the acquisition is completed, the result curve is automatically displayed. The Delay curve is always displayed first.

Fit Formula Alarm

Measured points

Normalized to km

174

Fig. 79

Delay Curve

The information provided with the delay curve may be different depending on to the parameters settings.

In the Figure 79

, the following parameters have been configured:

Alarms

Normalized to km

Show Measured Points

Show Fit Formula

Active (within the threshold defined)

Yes

NOTE

If the parameter "Normalized to km" is set to No, the result table will not display the Dispersion Coef (ps/nm.km) values.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

Display of CD results

Functions available

Delay / Dispersion / Slope

Once the delay curve is displayed, you can change to the Dispersion, then the Slope Curve, using the

Delay / Dispersion / Slope

key.

Fig. 80

Example of the Slope display

Trace/Table

Enables to display either:

– the trace only (with one CD result linked to the cursor position on the trace)

– the table only

– split screen with both trace and table..

The results table displays the following values for each wavelength:

– Wavelength (depending on the range and increment defined in the

Setup menu)

– Delay

– Total dispersion

– Dispersion Coefficient (if

Normalized to km

is set to

Yes

in the

Setup menu. If not, this column is empty).

– Slope

The blue line at the top of the table displays the following information:

– The Bit Rate Info. used for the Pass/Fail indication

– L0: zero dispersion wavelength

– So: Slope at L0

User Manual 780000102/19 175

Chapter 10

CD measurements using phase shift method

File Management

Wavelength

To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one, press the

Wavelength key and use the arrow keys and or and . The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table (yellow highlight).

File Management

Storing CD measurements

If Auto store was selected, then the results are saved automatically.



If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

Press

ILE

key

Select

Setup

with the key

Setup/Explorer/Fiber Info

Modify the parameters

Press

Store Trace

softkey

The Chromatic Dispersion results are stored with the extension ".ocd".

The Reference measurement and the CD measurement files have both the extension ".ocd" but can be differentiated by the information displayed in the File signature, on upper part of the screen:

Reference File Signature

Measurement File Signature

Fig. 81

File Signature for Reference and CD measurement

Recalling reference or CD measurement files

Once a CD file is stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:

Select

Explorer

with the key

Setup/Explorer/Fiber Info.

Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

Press

Load

Press

View Tace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

For further informations on file management, see

Chapter 14 “File management” .

176 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

This chapter describes the functions of the OFI module (Optical Fiber

Installation) and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“OFI module” on page 178

–

“Selection of the OFI module” on page 178

–

“LTS function” on page 178

–

“FOX Function” on page 186

–

"Manual ORL" page 196

–

“File Management” on page 198

User Manual 780000102/19 177

Chapter 11

OFI Module

OFI module

OFI module

The OFI module is used to make insertion loss measurements, ORL measurements and distance measurements.

The following functions are available with the OFI Module:

– Loss Test Set

– FOX (Fiber Optic eXpert)

Selection of the OFI module

Push the

YSTEM

button.

Select the icon to start the LTS function, and / or the icon to start the FOX function, or the icon to start the ORL function, using the key

LTS function

Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements

Power measurement

A power meter, is all that is needed to measure emitted or received power:

– to measure emitted power, connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter;

– to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver, the power meter is connected to the end of the fiber, at the point where the optical receiver would be connected.

178 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

Attenuation measurements

(optical link loss)

For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in elements such as sections of fiber, connections or optical components, a light source and a power meter are required.

This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points:

Laser light source of the

Base Unit

Power meter of the Base Unit

Reference fiber

Link under test

Attenuation A

(dB)

= P1

(dBm)

- P2

(dBm)

To perform accurate measurements, the following conditions are vital

– Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature.

– Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean.

– Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject.

If several measurements are to be made under identical light injection conditions, this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place.

Insertion loss method

The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the reference fiber: P1 is measured.

Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter: P2 is measured.

The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test.

It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested, to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2.

Accuracy of measurements

– A high degree of accuracy is often required. It is then necessary to perform a preliminary calibration without the fiber under test to eliminate the losses due to connections as far as this is possible. To do this, use the «Reference Value» function.

User Manual 780000102/19 179

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

– For measurements in the laboratory, where both ends of the fiber are on the same site, the repeatability of attenuation measurements is better than 0.1 dB. For measurements in the field, where the two ends are on different sites, variations from one measurement to another are of the order of ± 0.2 dB (using a relative measurement).

Connections to the power meter and the source

FOX connector

Power meter connector

Fig. 82

Optical connectors

The type of optical connector used for the power meter is UPP (Universal

Push Pull), which is compatible with all diameter 2.5 mm connectors (FC,

SC, ST, DIN, E2000, etc.).

NOTE

The source connection is the same as the FOX port.

Configuring the

LTS

To activate the function:

– Press the

YSTEM

button

– Use the direction keys to select the LTS icon green) and press the confirmation key will turn yellow.

(framed in

: the icon in the frame

The effect of this action will be to bring the power meter into use, but not to activate the source.

Configuring the measurement parameters of the power meter

The measurement parameters can be accessed with the

ETUP

key.

180 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

Fig. 83

Wavelength

User choice

Configuration of power measurement

Selecting wavelength:



- Auto: the wavelength of the input signal will be automatically detected and selected to perform the measurement.



850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1420, 1450, 1480, 1490,

1510, 1550 or 1625 nm: measurement performed at specified wavelength.



- User: choice of wavelength on the next line in the menu.

(if the User option was selected in the Lambda line) selection of the wavelength between 800 nm and 1650 nm, in 1 nm steps, by means of the

Beep on modulation Select wether a sound must be emitted or not when a modulation occured (Yes / No).

Unit Unit of power displayed:

- Watt, dBm for displaying absolute power

Reference level

- dB for displaying a result relative to a reference

(link loss)

If dB units were chosen in the previous line, selection of the reference value for the wavelength selected. Using the direction keys, first choose the wavelength, then press the > key to access choice of the value (+XXX.XX), then confirm this value with the validation key .

This reference is also automatically available, in the Results page, using the

Set as Reference

key.

wavelength chosen for measurement to compensate for the loss due to the external attenuator (+XX.XX dB). First use the direction keys to choose the wavelength, then press > to access choice of value, then confirm this value by pressing the validation key .

User Manual 780000102/19 181

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

NOTE

To copy a Reference Level or a Attenuator Compensator on all wavelengths, select the reference wavelength and click on

Update for All

Wavel.

Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter

Alarm Activation of the Alarm function : any result below the lower threshold or above the upper threshold will be displayed in red on the Results page.

Lower and upper thresholds :

Choice of lower and upper thresholds for each available wavelength, from -60 to +40 dBm

(selected with the direction keys).

NOTE

To copy one value of the Lower or/and Upper threshold for all wavelengths, select the reference value and click

Update for All Wavel.

NOTE

A continuous push on the direction keys, increments the value by 10 dBm.

Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source

Source

182

Fig. 84

Source configuration

When the laser is on, the icon is displayed.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the results screen of the LTS module, by pressing the

Source Configuration

soft key.

Wavelength

Mode

To change the wavelength when a multi-wavelength source is present (depending on option).

The wavelength value is displayed.

To vary the mode of emission of the source. Possible modulation values are:

– 270 Hz

– 330 Hz

– 1 kHz

– 2 kHz

– Auto (the sources emit on determined frequencies to enable the power meter to detect the wavelength used automatically)

– Twintest (cyclical emission on all available wavelengths for a few seconds on each wavelength), compatible with the JDSU OLP

5/6/15/16/18.

– CW (continuous emission)

The mode used is displayed, above the icon .

Power

In CW mode

, you can choose the emitted power:

- either the nominal value: -3.5 dB

- or an attenuation of -3 or -6 dBm, with regard to this nominal value, to get a power of 6.5 dBm or of 9.5 dBm.

For all the other modes (270Hz / 330Hz / 1kHz / 2 kHz / Auto / Twintest), select one of the following emitted power: -12.5 , -9.5, -6.5 dBm.

Display of results and command

The results page called up by the

ESULTS

button

gives the information relating to the measurement in progress, results previously saved and the commands available for measurement and saving.

Result of the measurement in progress

The power measured by the power meter is displayed in large characters, in the units selected in the

ETUP

menu, together with:

– the mode of transmission of the signal measured: continuous (CW) or modulated to a frequency of 270Hz, 330Hz, 1KHz, or 2KHz.

User Manual 780000102/19 183

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

– the wavelength of the signal measured.

– the reference level expressed in dB.

– the level of Attenuation Compensation.

Table of results

For one and the same fiber, the power meter displays a table of 9 results corresponding to the different possible wavelengths. The table shows the power measured in dBm, the relative power (in dB) and the reference level in dBm (if units = dB), together with the mode.

A measurement result is displayed in the table when the

Keep Result

softkey is pressed.

The

Clear Table

softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table. Otherwise, results are shown in the table in green.

When the instrument is switched off, results present in the table are saved.

Results of the power meter

Fig. 85

Results and commands of the LTS

Commands of the power meter parameters

When the LTS function is selected, the following softkeys are available on the results page:

<Set as reference> Selects the current result as reference value to measure the attenuation of a link. This reference is displayed under the measurement result until a new reference value is chosen.

184 User Manual 780000102/19

<Zero>

Chapter 11

OFI Module

LTS function

Adjustment of the Zero value when the power meter’s optical input is closed with a plug.

Saves the result on the corresponding line of the table.

Deletes all the results recorded in the table.

Making a measurement

The power meter is started up as soon as the LTS function vated in the

ETUP

menu.

is acti-

NOTE

Power measurement is automatically updated in consequence. The value «<-60 dB» is displayed when the laser is switched off and if the source output is looped on to the power meter input.

If the OFI module’s source is used, the

TART

TOP

key must be used to start or stop emission of light.

Power measurement

– Connect the light source to be tested to the rear connector (see

"Connections to the power meter and the source" page 180 ).

– In the

ETUP

menu, choose the units dBm, dB or Watts.

– Press the

TART

TOP

key to start the laser

The result will appear in the results page and can be memorized in

the table (see "Table of results" page 184

– Press the

TART

TOP

key to stop the laser

Optical link loss Setting the zero value of the power meter

It is important to set the zero of the power meter before making any measurements where accuracy is required, as the noise from the photodiode fluctuates over time and with variations in temperature.

Fix the plug over the optical input of the power meter so that no light can reach the photodiode of the power meter. If the zero adjustment is made without this plug, an error message may be displayed, as the photodiode will detect too much light.

In the

Results

page, press the

Zero

soft key.

Carrying out the reference measurement

Fix the adapter corresponding to the jumper to the optical connector of the power meter.

User Manual 780000102/19 185

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Connect the jumper between the input of the power meter and the output of the source.

Configure the same wavelength on the source and the power meter.

The power measured is displayed in the results page of the LTS.

Press the

Set as Reference

soft key to save the result displayed as reference value.

Measurements on the fiber under test

After defining the reference value, proceed as follows to make the measurement:

Fix the jumpers and connectors needed to connect the fiber to be tested between the source output and the power meter input.

In the set-up menu, select dB units.

The power displayed in the Power Meter window corresponds to the optical loss of the link tested. It can be displayed in the table (see

"Table of results" page 184 ).

FOX

Function

The FOX function is used to make automatical, bidirectional optical power measurements and / or ORL measurements at one or several wavelengths.

This function is also used to make a distance measurement of the link under test.

Two Base Unit are required, each one equipped with an OFI module at each end of the fiber.

The OFI module 81xx is also compatible with the OFI-2000.

With the FOX function , the two Base Units can communicate and send messages to each other.

Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement

Two types of parameters can be modified in the FOX configuration of the

OFI.

– The Acquisition parameters

– The results screen parameters.

1.Fiber Optic eXpert

186 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Fig. 86

FOX parameters

Acquisition parameters

–

Laser

All / 1550 / 1310 / 1625 / 1550 + 1310 / 1550 +

1625 / 1310 + 1625

–

Measurements

Loss / Loss + ORL / Loss + Length / Loss + ORL +

Length

NOTE

The acquisition and measurement parameters can change according to the OFI plug-in used.

Results screen parameters

– Index Of Refraction

– Preset index

– 1550 SM

Preset Index

User

Corning SMF-28

Lucent Truewave

SpecTran SM

Litespec

ATT SM

Fitel Furukawa

Corning SMF-DS

Corning SMF-LS

Corning Leaf

E-SMF

–

Unit

–

Alarms

km / kfeet / miles

Active ; used to set alarms.

1550 SM

from 1.30000 to 1.70000

1.46810

1.47320

1.46810

1.46700

1.47000

1.47110

1.47000

1.46840

1.46450

User Manual 780000102/19 187

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

– Loss: enter the loss threshold for each wavelength (in dB).

– ORL: enter an ORL threshold for each wavelength (in dB).

– Delay: enter a delay time (in µs).

– Length: indicative value, changes according to the delay time and the fiber index.

To change the alarms values, use the direction keys and or the numeric keypad.

File Storage parameters

–

Filenaming

–

Auto Store

[Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Fiber_Code]

Yes (cannot be modified)

–

Fiber Nbr Increment

Yes (cannot be modified)

In the FOX function:

– the measurement results are automatically saved

– the fiber number is automatically incremented.

To display the fiber to be tested, push the

TART

TOP

button in the

results page of the FOX function (see "Choosing the fiber to be tested" page 193 ).

Establishing a reference

Before making a power, a ORL and / or distance measurement with the

FOX function of the OFI module , you have to take references.

On the

RESULTS

page, push the

References

button.

Different references can be taken:

– For a loss measurement

– Side by Side reference

– Loopback reference

– For an ORL measurement

– Power emitted reference

– Zero ORL

NOTE

As the ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not automatically available with the OFI module.

188 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Establishing a reference for loss measurement

Before any measurement, you must establish references.

Two methods can be used to take references: taking a side by side reference and taking the reference in a loop-back mode.

Taking a side by side reference

NOTE

This reference can only be performed when the two Base Unit are at the same location.

On the

ESULTS

page, push the

References

key.

Push the

Loss Side/Side

key.

Link the FOX connectors of the two Base Units by using two jumpers.

Push on

key.

Reference date.

Type and serial number of the distant instrument

Fig. 87

Taking a side by side reference (8000 series example)

Once the references are taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the distant instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.

The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the distant instrument are indicated on the first line of the table.

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumpers at the middle point, in order to insert the fiber to be tested.

User Manual 780000102/19 189

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

If the reference taken is not correct, take a new reference.

If the reference measurements are too weak, a warning is displayed.

Clean all connections to improve the reference measurements.

The reference is only valid if the jumpers are not disconnected from the Base Unit.

Taking the reference in a loopback mode

NOTE

This reference can be made wether the Base Units are on the same site or not.

Connect the optical output of the source (FOX port) to the optical input of the power meter by means of a jumper.

Push the

References

key.

Push the

Loss Loopback

key.

Push the

key.

190

Fig. 88

Taking a reference in a loop-back mode

Once the reference is taken, the reference table is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the local instrument are indicated on the first line of the table.

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumper in order to connect the fiber to be tested.

If the reference is not correct, take a new reference.

Establishing a reference for an

ORL measurement

Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for a ORL measurement:

Power emitted reference

Zero ORL adjustment

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL measurement

NOTE

As ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not automatically available with the OFI module.

ORL Emitted power

Link the FOX port to the power meter input port via a jumper.

Click on

ORL Power Emitted

Click on the Go key. The power measurement from the laser signal emitted is completed.

Fig. 89

Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement

User Manual 780000102/19 191

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.

As the Zero mesurement as not yet been done, the first line of the table displays the message Ref ORL : Incomplete.

ORL Zero adjustment

Once the Power Emitted measurement has been carried out, the Zero adjustment can be performed:

Disconnect the jumper from the external power meter and wrap this jumper, still connected to the FOX port, around the mandrel (6 to 7 times).

Click on

ORL Zero

Push the

key

Fig. 90

Adjustement of the ORL Zero

Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.

Once the two references are complete, the date as well as the type and serial number of the local instrument are displayed on the first line of the table.

If not, the message Ref ORL : Incomplete is displayed.

192

Measurement acquisition

Before making an automatic FOX measurement, check that:

– both Base Units (local and distant) as well as the OFI module on each instrument are powered on and the FOX function selected.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

– the FOX function is correctly configured (

ETUP

menu).

– each end of the fiber is correctly connected to the module.

– the fiber and jumpers are in good condition.

To display the fiber measurement page, push the

ESULTS

key.

The page displays:

– Both instruments connected to the link (local and distant).

– The

Results

table with the last measurement made.

– The tested fiber parameters

Choosing the fiber to be tested

Once the results page is displayed, push the

TART

TOP

button.

The details of the next fiber to be tested are displayed.

Fig. 91

Details of the following fiber to be tested

To test a different fiber to the one displayed, select the new fiber according to its number or its color code.

Use the direction keys and to change the number or color code of the fiber to be tested.

Changing the fiber number involves a modification of the color code and vice versa.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measurements are correct (see

"Establishing a reference" page 188

Push the

TART

TOP

button once more to start the measurement of the selected fiber.

The results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both Base

Units.



During the measurement, the soft keys on the right of the screen are inactive.

Once the measurement has finished, the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the sequence. The beep differs, depending on wether the measurement has completed correctly or according to the measurement/ alarm status.

User Manual 780000102/19 193

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Identifying the distant module

Before making a measurement, you can check presence of the distant module.

Once the results page is displayed, click on

Identify distant

The distant module identification is made automatically.

Distant

Module

Fig. 92

Distant module Identification

Data from the distant instrument is displayed: The serial number and the operator name on this instrument.

Check this data before making a measurement or taking a reference.

Displaying results for a

FOX automatic measurement

The measurement results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both Base Units.

During the measurement, the following icon is displayed and the keys on the right of the screen are inactive.

Once the measurement has finished:

– the icon turns grey

– keys are active.

– the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the measurement.

194 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

FOX Function

Fig. 93

Result of a FOX automatic measurement

The data displayed in the table can vary according to the acquisiton

parameters (see "Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement" page 186

Sending a message

When two Base Units are connected at each end of the fiber, via their

FOX port, they can send messages to each other.

Two types of messages are available:

– predefined messages (10)

– User-definable messages(4)

The message sent by one Base Unit will be displayed on the screen of the other Base Unit.

To send a message to the distant Base Unit:

In the Results page, push the

Send Message

key.

Fig. 94

Messages that can be sent to the distant Base Unit

User Manual 780000102/19 195

Chapter 11

OFI Module

Manual ORL

A menu with 10 predefined messages available is displayed.

Another menu with 4 messages the user can defined is also displayed.

Select the message to be sent using the direction keys and .

To enter a user message, select one of the last 4 messages (called

User_messages) and push the direction key .

The edition keypad is displayed.

Enter the text you want and push the

Valid

key on the keypad or on the screen.

Push the

Send Message

Select

key.

On the distant Base Unit, the message is displayed with the icon

Press any key to delete the message.

NOTE

If the link is not established between the two Base Unit, the following error message is displayed: «No acknowledge received for the SMS sent».

Manual ORL

The OFI module can be equipped with the ORL function (option), which allows to make an ORL manual measurement .

However, before making this measurement, the references have to be established once the ORL tab has been selected on the OFI module or on the Base Unit, in the

YSTEM

page.

196

Fig. 95

Selection of the ORL function

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

Manual ORL

The functions LTS, FOX and ORL can be selected at the same time on the OFI module.

However, the LTS and ORL functions from the Base Unit cannot be selected simultaneously.

Establishing a reference for an

ORL manual measurement

Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for an ORL manual measurement:

Power emitted reference: see

"ORL Emitted power" page 191

Zero ORL adjustment: see

"ORL Zero adjustment" page 192

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL manual measurement

Establishing references is only valid for a specific module or function.

For example, the references for an ORL automatic measurement are only available for the FOX function (a new reference must be redone for an ORL manual measurement.).

Moreover, the Manual ORL references made with the Base Unit are not valid with an OFI module.

NOTE

As ORL manual is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not automatically available with the OFI module.

Measurement acquisition

The page displays:

– The results screen with the wavelength and the ORL references established.

– The table where are saved the ORL measurements.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measurements are correct (see

"Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement" page 197

Push the

TART

TOP

key to start the measurement.

User Manual 780000102/19 197

Chapter 11

OFI Module

File Management

Display of results for an

ORL manual measurement

To display the fiber measurement page, push the

ESULTS

key.

For each wavelength, push the key Keep Result to display the result in the table.

The

Clear Table

softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table.

Fig. 96

Results for an ORL manual measurement

Once all the results are displayed, click on the

ILE

button to save the file in a directory.

File Management

Storing results

Although each measurement is automatically stored (for FOX results only), it is possible to save the results under a different file name, directory etc.

Once the results are displayed:

Push the

ILE

button

Select

Setup

with the key

Setup/Explorer

Modify the parameter you want in the

ILE

configuration menu

198 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 11

OFI Module

File Management

Click on the

Store Trace

key

The FOX files are saved with the extension «.FOX».



The LTS files are saved with the extension «.LTS».



The ORL files are saved with the extension «.ORL»

With the LTS and ORL results, two files are saved :

The first file is to be used with the Base Unit and allows all LTS measurements results to be retrieved. It is saved with the extension

«.LTS» or «.ORL».

The second file is an ASCII file using tabulations to separate values. It is saved with the extension «.txt» and cannot be opened by the Base

Unit. It has been designed to be used with a spreadsheet program on a PC where it allows all LTS measurement results to be retrieved and formatted in a customized table.

For more details on file management, see "File management" page 217 .

Recalling files

To recall a LTS, FOX or ORL file:

Go to the

Explorer

Select the directory

Select the file to load

Click on

Load

Click on

View Trace(s)

Load Trace + Config.

The selected file is opened

User Manual 780000102/19 199

Chapter 11

OFI Module

File Management

200 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

This chapter describes the function of the MTAU (Multi Test Access Unit) module and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

"Function of the MTAU module" on page 202

–

"Connections" on page 202

–

"Configuration" on page 203

–

"Manual mode" on page 203

–

"Auto mode" on page 204

–

"Use of the Fiber Characterization script" on page 207

The main application of this module is to be used together with the 8000 platform.

User Manual 780000102/19 201

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Function of the MTAU module

Function of the MTAU module

The MTAU is a passive module (switch) used to route the signals from the different measurement plug-ins to one and the same fiber.

The advantage is to be able, for example, to make all the characterization measurements (insertion loss, reflectometry, chromatic dispersion, spectrum and polarization measurements) with a single Base Unit

without ever disconnecting the fiber.

Connections

The MTAU plug-ins offer a common port with 4 ports A, B,C and D.

The fiber to be tested must be connected to the common port .

The other ports are connected to the measurement plug-ins, e.g. OTDR,

CD, OSA, PMD, or an external instrument.

Two Base Units can be used at each end of the link under test for maximum efficiency and to carry out the largest number of tests in both directions.

NOTE

The MTAU is not directional. It is possible to use the common port either as an input or as an output.

202

Fig. 97

Inputs for connection to the different plug-ins

Output: fiber under test

MTAU plug-in with 1 common & 4 ports

1.Equipped with suitable plug-ins, for example an OTDR/CD plug-in and a WDM/

PMD plug-in.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Configuration

Configuration

To use the MTAU function, go into the

YSTEM

menu and select the icon

using the key .

Then go into the

ETUP

ESULTS

menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-in) to access the screen from which the the input channels can be switched.

The screen displays a diagram of the input and outputs to the switching device.

Common port

Port B

Switching button

Port D

Port A

Port C

Fig. 98

Manual mode for the MTAU plug-in

Manual mode

To switch each output, use the button

Port A/Port B/Port C/Port D

. Each click on this button switches the next output port.

The active port and the link to the common port are shown green, while the other ports remain grey.

NOTE

To optimize manipulation, always use the

ESULTS

key to change over from this screen to the screen corresponding to each measurement.

User Manual 780000102/19 203

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Auto mode

Auto mode

The auto mode offers the best way to test a full cable. The purpose is to set a sequence of operations, which will be performed for each fiber, one after the other with no need to modify the configuration or to go to each measurement tab. All operations can be handled from the MTAU tab.

NOTE

The switch between measurement (if necessary) is automatic. Nevertheless launching each measurement remains the user responsibility, as some extra equipment might be needed (ex broadband source for

PMD).

Select

Auto

on the key

Manual/Auto

to switch to auto mode or vice et versa.

Icons representing available functions

Links showing that OTDR will be performed on port A, PMD and

AP on port C

204

Fig. 99

Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in

Different icons appear at the top of the screen, showing different available functions. According to your Base Unit configuration, you may have all the following functions available :

– OTDR

– PMD

– CD

– AP

– OSA

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Auto mode

Configuration of the sequence of tests

Make sure you select all necessary functions in the

ETUP

menu.

NOTE

Icons for selected functions appear in yellow, icons for available but unselected functions appear in grey.

Go to each tab if necessary to make sure all setup values are correct for each selected function.

Select the

Function Cursor

key, and choose which function you wish to configure in the list of icons.

Select the

Port Cursor

key, and choose which port is connected to the corresponding function.

Click on the key to validate the association. A solid link will be drawn between the function and the port you selected (see the figure "Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in" on page 204 ).

Go back to step ’3’ for the next function if necessary.

NOTE

It is not possible to affect the same function to different ports.

NOTE

Functions that are offered by the same physical module may only be connected to the same port.

When the sequence is completely configured, you can view which function is connected to which port thanks to all the solid links (see the figure

"Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in" on page 204 ).

Various link colors are offered to differentiate each port :

– light blue for port A

– red for port B

– pink for port C

– dark blue for port D

IMPORTANT

If a function used in the sequence configuration is deselected in the

YSTEM

page, the configuration automatically deletes the corresponding link but keeps the rest of the configuration in memory. Reselecting the function does not automatically recreate the link.

User Manual 780000102/19 205

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Auto mode

NOTE

The last configuration is saved in the Base Unit and may be retrieved after a complete reboot, unless the hardware configuration has changed (for example if a new module is inserted).

Performing the sequence of tests

Connect the fiber to test to the MTAU common port.

Click on

TART

TOP

to start the sequence.

A message is displayed requesting to confirm you wish to start the measurement, such as «Start SM-OTDR measurement ?».

Answering

cancels all the sequence but keeps the configuration in memory.

Answering

Yes

starts the first measurement.

After each measurement is done, a new message follows if another measurement is configured in the sequence such as in step 3

The sequence is terminated when no more message is displayed and the led from the MTAU tab changes from . to . Go back to step ’1’ with a new fiber.

The order of the sequence will take in consideration the order in which the sequence is displayed on screen, starting with the ports order, then with the functions order. In our example, the sequence will measure successively OTDR, OSA then PMD.

Some messages may appear during the sequence to request specific actions necessary for the measurement (just like «check source» appears before a PMD measurement).

The focus is on the active function and the link becomes green.

Even though this is not necessary, it is possible to go to the measurement corresponding tab when a function is being used, and see the results of the acquisition.

If a function is deselected in the

ETUP

page while the sequence is launched, the sequence is automatically updated and continues if the function was not currently used, or is immediately stopped otherwise.

In this last case, an error message is displayed indicating that the function has been deselected.

If you wish to stop a measurement but not the sequence, go to the corresponding measurement tab and click on

TART

TOP

206 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

To use the Script function, external keyboard and mouse are mandatory

(see "Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)" on page 21

The Fiber Characterization script is always used with the MTAU module.

The aim is to automate a test sequence with the different plug-in modules and associated test functions available in the MTS/T-BERD 8000.

Connect the modules to the

MTAU

To perform a a test sequence with the fiber characterization script, you must connect the available plug-in modules to MTAU ports as follow:

– OTDR Module (Event characterization) : PORT A

– OFI Module (Bi-directional IL/ORL): Port B

– ODM Module (Chromatic Dispersion / PMD / Attenuation profile):

Port C

– BBS Module (Broadband Source): Port D

Connect all test functions to the MTAU module as described

Connect the fiber under test to the common port;

NOTE

Leave the port not connected if you don't have the associated test plug-in module.

Video

Inspection

Scope

ODM (CD/PMD/AP) BBS2A

Keyboard

(USB port)

Fig. 100

MTAU 4: Multi-Test Access unit allowing a single connection/ disconnection of the fiber under test for multiple measurements

Jumper A

Fiber under test

OTDR

OFI (IL/ORL)

Com

COM port : Connect to fiber under test.

Connections

User Manual 780000102/19 207

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

This function requires use of separate broadband light source at the far end.

Launching the

Script

Push the

CRIPT

key to access the menu

Select the Link characterization script

Press

LAY

to launch it.

Fig. 101

Page Script

The script will allow to select within the test functions available in the

8000 platform.

Using a keyboard, enter the Job configuration (cable commissioning, ring…) and link documentation.

Available test functions

Job & Link description

208

Fig. 102

Test Sequence configuration

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

The contents of the summary table, which is always available, will depend on the available test functions, the user will be able to define the fields to display by using the key Select results to display.

Fig. 103

Summary table contents

Press

TART

and define from which end the test will start.

Fig. 104

Start the test sequence

Inspect before you connect the fiber to test

– Inspect

– Clean

– Inspect again

Connect the fiber and press the

CRIPT

button when inspection is done.

Validate each start of measurement: OTRD / IL/ORL / PMD / AP /

CD.

User Manual 780000102/19 209

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

Total test time: 3 minutes per fiber

In the following screen, click on Yes to move to next fiber to test

Fig. 105

Move to next fiber

Once all measurements are performed, results are summarized in the overview table and the distant unit can start testing. Click on Ok.

Once all the measurements are performed, the result table is displayed

210

Fig. 106

The results summary is filled in with the last 5 fiber measurements and the user can scroll up and down to view the other fibers tested.

The data are automatically saved in one directory.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

Fig. 107

Directory automatically generated

All raw OTDR, CD, PMD and AP traces are saved (5 per fiber: 1310

OTDR, 1550 OTDR, PMD, CD and AP files).

The test set automatically creates a *.txt file which saves Loss, ORL,

OTDR, CD, PMD and AP results in pre-formatted columns. This file can be opened on a PC with a spreadsheet program (e.g. Excel...)

Job Information

OTDR Results

CD Results

PMD Results

AP Results

Fig. 108

Example of txt file opened via Excel

User Manual 780000102/19 211

Chapter 12

Multi Test Access Unit

Use of the Fiber Characterization script

212 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 13

Broadband source BBS

This chapter describes the function of the BBS (Broadband Source) module and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Function of the BBS module” on page 214

–

“Activation process” on page 214

–

“Remote interlock connector” on page 215

User Manual 780000102/19 213

Chapter 13

Broadband source BBS

Function of the BBS module

Function of the BBS module

The broadband source (BBS) module, covers two different wavelengths:

– from 1260 to 1640 nm with the 81BBS2A

– from 1460 to 1640 nm with the 81BBS1A.

They are used to measure the attenuation profile, chromatic dispersion and PMD of optical fibers.

Activation process

To use the BBS function, go into the

YSTEM

menu and select the BBS icon using the key .

Go into the

ETUP

ESULTS

menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-in) to access the BBS settings.

Press the

OURCE

key.

Entrer the password 4877, using the direction keys pressing the numerical keyboard with the stylus..

, or by

Press the

ONFIRM

soft key to validate the password.

Password

4877

214

Valid

Fig. 109

Password Validation page

The source is on and the icon is displayed.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 13

Broadband source BBS

Remote interlock connector

Configuration with the 81BB2A module

Fig. 110

Configuration of the BBS2A

Select CD, AP/PMD or ALL transmission mode to perform the corresponding test using the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module.

If a CD mode is selected, the key Full Band/SCL Band is displayed and allow to select transmitted wavelength range.

Configuration with the 81BB1A module

Fig. 111

Configuration of the BBS1A

Select CD, AP/PMD or ALL transmission mode to perform the corresponding test using the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module.

If the parameter All is selected, the dynamic range will be degraded by 3 dB.

Remote interlock connector

The use of a Remote Interlock system is specified with class IIIb sources by 21 CFR 1040.10 (USA).

The BBS module is equipped with a remote interlock connector (SMB type) on the front pannel. This is aimed to protect the user from injury when using class IIIb light sources.

User Manual 780000102/19 215

Chapter 13

Broadband source BBS

Remote interlock connector

If the short circuit at the SMB connector is opened, the broadband light source is switched off immediately and cannot be switched on until it is closed again.

Remote interlock connector

Fig. 112

Remote interlock connector

216 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“File configuration menu” on page 218

–

“Explorer Function” on page 229

–

“Link Manager Function” on page 239

–

“CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)” on page 242

In System > Standalone Results > Consult Fiber Optics, the files can be loaded and traces can be displayed or saved even when no module is set into the Base Unit.

User Manual 780000102/19 217

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

File configuration menu

This menu is used to configure various parameters common to the whole of a cable.

– Press the

ILE

button. The following File menu appears.

Fig. 113

File Menu (example with OTDR plug-in)

Managing tabs

Tabs give access to the File menu of each application (OTDR, OSA,

Power Meter, etc.) present in the modules and plug-ins of the instrument.

It is possible to open a file even if the corresponding plug-in is not present in the instrument (e.g. OSA file without OSA plug-in). A new tab then temporarily manages this application.

When several different applications (corresponding to modules or plugins for different measurements) are managed by the Base Unit, pressing the

ILE

key several times in succession changes from one tab to another to give access to the file configuration of the desired application

(e.g. OTDR, OSA, etc.). See "Tabs" on page 19

218 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

File signature

The acquisition parameters of the trace contained in the selected file are displayed at the top of the screen together with a small-scale representation of the trace (provided it was acquired on a MTS / T-BERD Base

Unit) (see

"Mini-trace" on page 19

Laser

Fiber number

Pulse width

Color code

Refraction index

Name of the file

Mini-trace

Plug-in used

Resolution

Acquisition time

Extremity info

Direction of Date of the acquisition measurement

of the signal

Fig. 114

Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File

Menu)

File information

Current directory

The

Dir.

line of the menu shows the directory in which the traces will be stored.

This line can also be used to change the active storage medium directory. To do this, launch the directory editor by means of the key:

The directory edited must exist, otherwise it will not be taken into account. Change of medium and the creation and/or deletion of directories can only be done through the file explorer or link manager (see

"Explorer Function" on page 229

or "Link

Manager Function" on page 239 )

When recalling a trace, fiber parameters are shown in the signature, but not necessarily in the

FILE

menu. The

FILE

menu is used to edit parameters for the current or next acquisition, or to modify the signature of a stored trace only.

Rules for naming files

In the name of the file, it is possible to program automatic inclusion of parameters such as the name of the fiber, fiber code, identifiers (of the cable, its origin, its end) or the measurement parameters (direction, resolution, wavelength, pulse length).

User Manual 780000102/19 219

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

The <Filenaming> line shows the current filenaming rules and can be used to modify them.

To edit or modify these rules:

Go to to the

Filenaming

line

Press to call up the edit menu

Move around in the edit screen using the direction keys

Select the desired characters and parameters

Confirm each parameter or character selected by clicking on

Select

Enter

Cancel

to quit the edit screen (according to whether the modifications are to be applied or not).

220

Fig. 115

Editing filenaming parameters

The key

EFAULT

ILENAME

is displayed when the line

Filenaming

is selected, and allows to apply the file default name to the trace opened.

Example of filenaming:

File parameters

Resolution = 16 cm



Fiber number = 1

Filenaming rules selected

ABC[Resolution]Fiber_[Fiber_Code]

Filename obtained

ABC16_cmFiber_1

A file name can consist of up to 40 characters. However, beyond a certain length, the names will be truncated in the display on the Base

Unit, the end being replaced by «...».

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Name of a file

After an acquisition, and as long as the result has not been saved, the line below

Filenaming

gives the name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules.

If the file has been recalled from a memory, the line below

Filenaming

shows its name irrespective of whether it respects the current filenaming rules.

This name can then be modified by calling up the edit menu using the button . If a modification is then made to the filenaming rules, the file name will not be modified. To return to a name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules, simply delete the existing name.

Editing the name enables the trace to be saved in a new file (with a new name), but it cannot rename the existing file (this function is possible in the Explorer menu - see

"Storage media" on page 230 ). Thus

the new name will not be taken into account until the trace is saved again.

Auto store

If this option is validated, the trace or traces resulting from each acquisition are automatically saved according to the filenaming rules.

File Type / Save

Mode

OTDR files

Wheter one or several OTDR traces are displayed, you can select four types of method for storing traces

–

Single sor

: each trace will be saved, with the .sor extension.

–

Single sor + Txt

: each trace will be saved with the .sor extension, and a txt file will be generated for each one.

Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, and File type is set on

Single.sor, then 3 files with the extension .sor will be saved.

–

Multi msor

: all the traces opened in overlay will be saved in one single file, with the .msor extension

–

Multi msor + txt

: all the traces opened in overlay will be saved in one single file, with the .msor extension. One single txt file will also be generated.

Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, and the File Type parameter is set on Multi msor, then one single file will be saved, with the extension .msor.

OEO files

When an OEO trace is displayed, in the parameter File Type, you can select four types of method for storing traces:

User Manual 780000102/19 221

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

–

One oeo file

: the traces are stored in one file with the .oeo extension

–

One oeo file + txt;

the traces are stored in one file with the .oeo extension, and one txt file is also generated.

–

Single sor

: the traces are stored separately, in two files with the .sor extension.

–

Single sor + Txt

: the traces are stored separately, in two files with the .sor extension; and two txt files are generated (1 for each trace).

PMD / OSA / AP Files

When a PMD , OSA or AP trace is displayed, in the parameter Save

Mode

, you can select two types of methods for storing traces:

–

File Only

: only the trace is stored in one file, with its extension

(.pmd, .ap, .osa)

–

File + Txt

; he trace is stored in one file, with its extension and one txt file is also generated.

Fiber

Description

This paragraph gives the fiber information for the extremity defined in

Direction

. If the direction is O->E, then the fiber information concerns the origin. If the direction is E->O, it concerns the extremity.

NOTE

The information entered in the Fiber information window concerns the editing and/or modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recalling its configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

Fiber ID and Fiber

Number

The Fiber Id menu consists of an alphanumerical part entered by means of the edit menu, followed by the fiber number. This number is automatically incremented or decremented as a function of the fiber code.

Color code

The color code corresponds either to the fiber number, or to a color code, according to the choice made in

Cable structure> Color Coding

If a color code is selected, it can consist of the codes for the tube, the ribbon and the fiber itself. Its composition is defined in

Cable Structure>

Cable Content

222

Fiber Nbr

Increment

Fiber Nbr Increment

mode, the fiber code is automatically incremented at each new file-save.

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Incrementation is done as a function of:

– the max. number of fibers, tubes and ribbons defined in Cable

Structure (

Max Tubes, Max Ribbon, Max Fibers

)

– the composition of the color code, always incrementing first the fiber number, then the ribbon number, then (if applicable) the tube number

– the choices made, for each color code, in

Cable Structure

(Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding, Fiber Coding) and in

Code Definition

(see

"Cable structure" on page 224 ).

The fiber number may be incremented or decremented directly with keys and . or using the numeric keypad

NOTE

The Fiber Code and the fiber number concatenated with

Fiber Name

are interdependent: they are incremented or decremented at the same time. However, the fiber number remains a number only, while the fiber code is alphanumerical. Whether it includes a color code or not (see

"Cable structure" on page 224

), it may be composed of one, two or three parts (see figure page 223 ).

Fiber and cable parameters used in the example:

Fiber Name: ’Fiberx’



Cable Content: ’Tube/Fiber’



Max Tube: 12



Max Fiber: 24



Coding used for the fiber and the tube: TIA

Fiber N

Color Code

<Fiber Name>

<Fiber Code>

Yes

Fiberx24

Bl/Aq-

Fiberx24

1/24

Fig. 116

Fiber N+1

Yes

Fiberx25

Gold/Bl

Fiberx25

2/1

Example of incrementation of fiber code

Link description

The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the editing and/or the modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recall of the configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

User Manual 780000102/19 223

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Extremities are different

In some cases, it is interesting to save different information for the origin and the extremity of the cable.

If this option is validated, it is possible, after selecting the extremity to be edited in the

Cable Structure

menu, to modify the values specific to the cable (cable name, color coding, content of the coding), for each of these extremities. See chapter

"Cable structure" on page 224 )

To display/modify the data specific to the fiber (name and code), it is necessary to change direction temporarily. In the "O->E" direction, the information on the origin can be edited, and in the "E->O" direction, that on the extremity.

Cable Id

This parameter allows to enter an identification of the cable, using the

Edition menu.

This parameter is available if the previous one, Extremities are different, is set to No.

Direction

The direction shows if the acquisition has been made from the origin to the extremity (O->E) or from the extremity to the origin (E->O). Changing direction makes it possible, when different extremities are handled, to see the parameters of the fiber for the other extremity.

Origin

The name of the origin of the link may be entered here.

End Location

The name of the extremity of the link may be entered here.

Cable structure

This line opens a sub-menu, all the parameters of which can be different for each extremity.

224

Fig. 117

Cable structure menu

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

NOTE

The Cable Structure window is specific to an extremity. Each structure keeps its own parameters by default. Modifications made to the one are not automatically applied to the other. Thus, after the values relating to the origin have been modified, it is normal not to find these same values entered for the extremity.

Cable Id

If extremities are declared as different (see

"Extremities are different" on page 224

), this parameter allows to navigate between the Extremity and Origin parameters.

If the extremities are different, you can specify the cable identification for the origin and the extremity.

Color Coding

Cable content

– <Fiber>

Choice of whether or not to apply a color coding to the fiber. This choice is made at link level, as all the fibers of a given link, for a given extremity, will be coded the same way. This choice modifies the result of the <Fiber Code> line. See

"Fiber Nbr Increment" on page 222 .

Shows how the color code is to be used (see figure

"Cable structure menu" on page 224 ):

: Only the color code of the fiber is proposed

(example: ’Gold’)

– <Ribbon/Fiber>: The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the ribbon, and separated by a ’/’ (example:

’Bl/Or’)

– <Tube/Fiber>: The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, and separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Or’)

– <Tube/Ribbon/Fiber>:

The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, then by that of the ribbon; the three being separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Bl/Or’).

See

"Fiber Nbr Increment" on page 222

Max tube

Max ribbon

Shows the maximum number of tubes in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See

"Fiber Nbr Increment" on page 222 .

Shows the maximum number of ribbons in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See

"Fiber Nbr Increment" on page 222

User Manual 780000102/19 225

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Max fiber Shows the maximum number of fibers in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See

"Fiber Nbr Increment" on page 222

NOTE

Certain parameters are not valid in the configuration selected. Thus, if no tube is selected in

Cable Content

, all the lines relating to the tube concept will be deactivated (grayed out in the menu).

Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding, Fiber Coding

The lines Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding and Fiber

Coding enable selection of the color coding of the tube, the ribbon and the fiber from 5 different codes described below: TIA, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3 and USER 4.

Code Definition The Code Definition line opens a sub-menu, with which the different color codes possible on the instrument can be displayed and modified (see figure "Color code definition" on page 227 ).

Five different codes can be managed by the Base Unit, including a standard code.

The standard code (TIA) may be displayed but it cannot be modified.

The other codes, called by default USER1, USER2, USER3 and USER4, can be entirely personalized.

– Edited code

– Copy name

–

View codes

Code 1..23

selects the code for display or modification.

to give a new name to the code selected, press the key, which calls up the edit menu.

displays the color codes 1 to 12, 13 to 24 or 25 to 36.

Use the arrow to modify the codes if necessary.

226 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Fig. 118

Color code definition

Operator

Use the arrow to enter the name of the operator carrying out the measurement.

Comment

In contrast to the other data in this menu, the comment is specific to a fiber, and not to the whole cable. This line is thus used to enter a new comment and not to display it. The comment appears at the top of the screen, with the other parameters of the fiber (see figure "Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File Menu)" on page 219 ).



This comment will remain available for the next acquisition, unless it is deleted. It is also saved when a trace is saved with a comment.

File export

This sub-menu appears when the option <mail> has been configured with one media, for example Ethernet, in the system setup menu (see the base manual of the Base Unit, reference 8000M02 for example.)

To send a mail, you must have filled the 2 following fields :

Mail to

Subject

Use the arrow key to enter in the edition window, and enter the name of the recipient.

Using the same key, enter the subject of the mail or a comment if necessary.

User Manual 780000102/19 227

Chapter 14

File management

File configuration menu

Buttons on the right of the screen

Saving traces

228

Fig. 119

Save

These buttons are used to save one or more traces/

–

Store Trace

: allows to save the current trace opened.

–

Store all Traces

: allows to store all the traces displayed in overlay

(OTDR and OSA only) in one single file.

The softkey

Next Trace

is used to activate the menu of the following trace, in an overlay configuration (OTDR and OSA only).

NOTE

If you want to store traces on CD-ROM and if no CD is set into the

MTS / T-BERD 8000, or if the CD is write protected, then the following message is displayed: Selected Storage device not present or write protected. Please select another device.

To copy the configuration on to all the tabs <Copy Setup for all>

Fig. 120

Copy Setup For All

The button

Copy Setup For all

applies the configuration modifications made in the File menu displayed into the File menus of the other applications managed by the base (appearing in the other tabs).

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Explorer Function

Fig. 121

Setup / Explorer

To access the Explorer function, after pressing the

ILE

button, press the

Setup/Explorer/Link Mgr.

key.

Description of the explorer

The explorer is used to select the storage medium, and to create or rename directories and files:

– The left-hand part presents the storage architecture. Use the keys and to move around among all the media and their respective directories.

– The right-hand part displays all the files present in the directory selected.

The direction keys can be used to move horizontally between the two parts and vertically within each zone.

At the top of the screen, the file signature selected is repeated (see

"Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File Menu)" on page 219 ).

User Manual 780000102/19 229

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Free space available on the selected media

Fig. 122

Example of explorer

Storage media

For saving or recalling data, the Base Unit offers a wide choice of media, both built-in and external.

Free space on selected media is clearly displayed at the bottom of the left panel.

Storage media built into the Base

Unit

– An internal memory

– A hard disk (or high capacity storage), on option. If this option is selected, then the hard disk replaces the internal memory.

– A 3 1/2 in. floppy disk drive, on option (8000 platform only)

– A CD-RW drive, on option (8000 platform only)

External USB storage media

The Base Unit is equipped with 2 USB ports as standard. One of these can be used to connect an external storage medium, in particular a USB memory stick.

NOTE

Although two USB ports are present, it is not possible to use simultaneously more than one external USB storage medium.

High capacity USB stick such as 2Go or higher are not recommended.

230 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

USB memory stick connection

Insert the USB memory stick in one 8000/6000 Base Unit's USB port.

A beep is emitted to confirm the successful insertion and recognition of a USB memory stick.

Then, the icon , is displayed in the upper banner to inform the user the USB stick is ready to be used.

Do not connect a USB memory stick while a USB printer is printing.

If the 8000/6000 Base Unit does not emit a beep, disconnect and reconnect the USB memory stick (do not perform this action too quickly - wait

5 seconds between the disconnection and reconnection).

If after several trials, no beep is emitted, two problems can be considered:

– A previous USB memory stick has not been properly disconnected.

Go to “USB memory stick disconnection” on page 232

– the USB memory stick is not detected by the Base Unit: use another

USB memory stick or transfer data via Ethernet (see user manual of the 6000 or 8000 Base Unit to access the internal memory via a

PC).

In case of errors, the icon is displayed:

– The stick is not formatted

– The stick has been removed without prior

JECT

USB

key use and some applications are still using it.

If the size of the free space is not correct, the USB memory stick must be formatted:

Press the

YSTEM

button

Successively select

Expert Tools

Media Utilities

Usbflash

Format c

Confirm your choice to format the USB memory stick

Once formatted, disconnect and reconnect the USB memory stick

As for any media formatting, please note that all data present on the USB memory stick will be irremediably lost.

User Manual 780000102/19 231

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

When a file is moved in the explorer of the Base Unit, the end of the move on the screen does not mean that writing of data into the memory is complete. Some data may still be in a writing process if the storage unit is removed prematurely.

USB memory stick disconnection

Before disconnecting the USB memory stick, always select a storage device different from usbflash (select disk for example) in the explorer.

Make sure you no longer have any running applications using the usbflash storage media.

The user must push the

JECT

USB

key, which is available in File >

Explorer

or Link Manager, but also in Expert Tools > Media Utilities.

The icon becomes to indicate it can be removed safely. In this state, the USB stick cannot be used anymore.

The USB memory stick can then be disconnected from the Base Unit's

USB port.

The disconnection of the USB memory stick produces one beep.

NOTE

If the Base Unit operates on battery and is switched off before the

USB memory stick is properly disconnected, all the applications using the usbflash storage media will be automatically turned off and the

USB memory stick can be disconnected afterwards without any problem.

NOTE

If the 8000/6000 Base Unit is on mains and is switched off before the

USB memory stick is properly disconnected, the Base Unit needs to be completely switched off (using the

button and main plug unplugged).

Standard Compact

Flash card (8000 platform only)

The Base Unit is equipped as standard with a slot in which a Compact

Flash card can be inserted.

The Compact Flash card must be inserted before switching on the instrument. It is strongly recommended that this medium should not be withdrawn or reinserted while the instrument is switched on.

232 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Remote Base Unit and data transfer

During a data transfer (with the option Data/Talkset), the distant Base

Unit hard drive connected by the fiber is displayed as a storage media.

File and directory edition features may all be used in the same manner with this storage media as with the other ones.

Abbreviations for storage media

The abbreviations used in the explorer for the different storage media are:

Abbreviation Storage medium

harddisk disk floppy cdrom

Hard disk

Internal flash memory (if no hard disk)

Floppy disk

CD-ROM

1 usbflash cflash

USB memory stick

Compact Flash memory card

1 masterdisk slavedisk

Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which initiated the connection

Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which accepted the connection

1. Only with MTS/T-BERD 8000

Remote hard drives are seen with different names, according to which one has initiated the connection. Nevertheless, possible actions on these disks are all the same. There are no master/slave relations for data exchange.

Directory edit function

The editing functions are similar to those of other explorers. The directories are at the top left of the screen. If the cursor is in this part, the functions proposed by the keys are specific to the management of the directories.

User Manual 780000102/19 233

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Selection of directories

If the cursor is in the left-hand part of the screen:

– the direction keys can be used to select a directory.

– the key opens the directory selected and closes it when pressed a second time.

Do not confuse "Selected" with "Active". A directory may be displayed in video inverse, to show that it is the current working directory. If it does not have a broken red line round it, it is not active.

Active: working directory

Selected: the cursor is here

Broken red line around

Fig. 123

Selected / Active File

Edition of directories

When a directory is selected, the keys offer the following functions:

<Create Directory> Creation of a new directory. An editor enables entry of its name.

<Rename Dir.> Renames the directory selected. An editor enables replacement of its current name.

<Edit> Opens a new menu providing functions for editing the directories:

Copy

, C

Paste

Delete

and

Merge

NOTE

A whole directory with its contents can be copied into another directory or on to another storage medium.

File editing function

The right-hand part of the screen can be used to work on the files in the directory selected.

A table gives the list of the files in the directory, showing for each one: its name, size, type and date of creation.

For files recognized by the Base Unit, the types are symbolized by icons.

234 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

OSA file (.OSA extension)

OTDR file (.SOR extension)

OEO file (.OEO extension)

PMD file (.PMD extension)

CD OTDR file (.CD extension)

AP file (.AP extension)

LTS file (.LTS extension)

ORL file (.ORL extension)

CD ODM file (.OCD extension)

Format of files

OTDR files that can be read by the Base Unit are type Bellcore 1.0, 1.1 and 2.0.

Other files that can be read by the Base Unit are specific to this instrument.

To read other formats, use JDSU’s FiberTrace or FiberCable software.

Easy file selection

The direction keys are used to position the cursor on the file to be selected.

Multiple selection of files

It is possible to select several files simultaneously to move them, delete or copy them on to another medium or to display the corresponding traces in overlay (see

"Display of several traces in overlay" on page 239 ).

To do this, press after each selection. The files selected appear in video inverse. To deselect a file, place the cursor on the name of the file and press the key again

NOTE

If a mouse is used, click on a file to select it, and click again to deselect it.

To select a list of files using the keys of the Platform:

Select and validate the first file of the list (red display)

Set the cursor on the last file of the list (blue display)

User Manual 780000102/19 235

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Press the right direction key to select all the files from the list

Fig. 124

List of files selected

If no file has been selected by the is positioned is taken as selected.

key, the file where the cursor

On the other hand, if a file has been selected with the the cursor is on another file, the latter is not selected!

key

, and

236

Commands relating to files

When a file is selected, the keys offer the following functions:

<Load>

<Edit>

Opens the sub-menu for display of traces. See chapter

"Loading files and displaying traces" on page 238

Direct selection of all the files in the directory. After this key has been pressed, its name changes to <Deselect

All> so that the operation can be cancelled if necessary.

Displays a sub-menu to copy, cut, paste, delete, rename or merge one or more files.

Using the Merge key, with the txt files.

When saving a measurement result, in addition to the trace file, a txt file can be saved for each measurement type:

– with OTDR traces, select «+ txt» in the line File Type on Menu screen (see 4100 Module Series User Manuals).

– with the LTS functions, the txt file is automatically generated when saving the results.

The key Merge is used to merge several txt files from measurements into one txt file, putting together the results of all txt files.

– In the explorer, select the txt files generated with the tracefilesyou want.

– Click on Edit > Merge key

The file merged_files.txt is automatically saved in the same directory as the one where the txt files have been selected..

User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

NOTE

The file

merged_files.txt

can be renamed once it is saved.

<Sort> Opens a sub-menu with which the files in the directory can be sorted by name, size, type or date.

<Send by mail> This option appears if <Mail> has been defined with a media in the system setup menu. The subject and the recipient of the mail are those set in the file setup menu (see

"File export" on page 227 ). Comments

may be added. This option allows to send files by email. After a few seconds, a message is displayed to inform the user that the mail has been sent successfully.

Saving Files from the

Explorer

When the explorer is displayed, the active trace for the selected tab is displayed in the File Signature.

You can then save the active trace:

Select a directory by clicking once on it

Click on Store to save the active trace or click on

Next Trace

to change the file signature on the top part of the screen and to save the next trace from traces in overlay

Click on Save.

If you wish, click on

ILE

button to display the Explorer page for another application and save, using the same method, the active trace from this application.

User Manual 780000102/19 237

Chapter 14

File management

Explorer Function

Displayed when two active overlaid traces are open.

The trace dexcribed in the file signature will be saved in the directory selected (in this example:

Demo Curves)

Fig. 125

Saving active trace from the explorer

This will open automatically the edition keypad, in order to give a filename for the active trace.

Loading files and displaying traces

To access the functions for loading one or more files, select the file(s) in the explorer and press

Load

. Several options are then available:

Simple loading

The key

View Trace(s)

enables simple loading of traces, using the current parameters of the Base Unit. The current trace is then replaced with this new trace.

Load with configuration

The key

Load Trace+Config

will display the traces, recalling the configuration recorded in the file. Thus the zooms, cursors and parameters present at the time of acquisition will be used for the display.

This function also enables to recall and set the parameters defined in the screens corresponding respectively to the

ILE

and

ETUP

keys.

It is then possible to perform an acquisition under the same conditions as those of the trace recalled.

– If the Base Unit was equipped with a different module from the current one when the trace was acquired, certain configuration parameters cannot be updated. A message warns the user of this.

238 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Link Manager Function

– If several traces are selected, the configuration used will be that of the first trace.

– If the number of traces added and the number of traces present is greater than 8, then the last traces added will not all be taken into account.

The configuration cannot be recalled if the trace was not originally created by a Base Unit.

Load Trace + Info

(with OTDR files only)

The OTDR traces can also be loaded without the parameters defined in the screen displayed via the

ETUP

key.

The key

OAD

RACE

+ I

NFO

will then display the OTDR traces, recalling exclusively the File information, such as the fiber name and number, direction, extremities etc. See

Figure 113 on page 218

Display of several traces in overlay

Up to 8 traces in the same application (OTDR, OSA, etc.) can be displayed simultaneously in overlay.

To obtain a display of multiple traces, two methods are possible:

– Select all the files to be loaded at the same time (see chapter

"Multiple selection of files" on page 235 )

– Add a trace at the same interval as those already displayed by means of the

Add Trace(s)

key.

Link Manager Function

The Link Manager function is available using the

INK

key and allows to display the explorer with all the link information for the active application.

Click as many times as necessary on the key

ENU

/ E

XPLORER

/ L

INK

to select

IBER

NFO

and display the corresponding files for the active tab.

NOTE

The Fiber Info. function is only available with the OTDR, CD, OSA,

PMD, AP and FOX functions.

User Manual 780000102/19 239

Chapter 14

File management

Link Manager Function

For exemple, if the Link Mgr. function is selected in the tab OTDR, only the link information from the OTDR files will be displayed (wether in multimode or singlemode).

Tab selected

Fig. 126

Link Manager. function (with OTDR files only)

According to the application selected, the fiber information available are different. The table below describes the fiber information displayed for each selected tab:

NOTE

The files in the Link Manager window can be sorted according each column available for a tab.

Table 2

Fiber Information displayed

CD OTDR CD ODM

Param.

OTDR

& OEO

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

6th

Lambda

Total

Loss

Fiber

Length

Nb of

Event

Length

Dispersion at 1550 nm

OSA PMD

Alarm status (icon) & Fiber number

Direction

Length

Nb Channel

Power Max.

Length

Delay 1

Dispersion at 1550 nm

Power Min.

OSNR Max

Coeff. 1

Delay 2

Length

1310 nm

1650 nm

Directory: Copy (or cut) / Paste; Rename, Delete, (see “Directory edit function” on page 233 ) and burn on CD (see

1625 nm

FOX

Length

L1310

L1550

L1625

240 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

Link Manager Function

Table 2

Fiber Information displayed

CD OTDR CD ODM

Param.

7th

8th

9th

OTDR

& OEO

Max

Splice

Total

ORL

Coeff at

1550 nm

OSA PMD

OSNR Min.

Coeff 2

FOX

O1310

O1550

OP162

Editing function

The same editing functions as those from the Explorer are available with the Link Manager function:

–

“CD-Rom burning

(MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)” on page 242 ).

– File(s): Copy / Cut, Rename, Delete (see

“File editing function” on page 234 ) except the merging function (as this is used with txt files).

Moreover, the Edit menu from the Fiber Info. function allows to export the whole directory, with the files corresponding to the active tab, in a txt file.

To export a directory:

Select the Link Manager function

Select the tab corresponding to the files you want to use

Select the directory to open

Select one file from the list

Click on

DIT

XPORT

The txt file is automatically generated, in the same directory as the one selected for the export.

The name by default for the txt file is: fiber_info_”name of applica-

tion selected”.txt.

For exemple, for the export of the Fiber Information from the OTDR application, the txt file will be called:

fiber_info_otdr.txt

This txt file is made of two parts:

– The Header, with general information: the equipment used and its serial number, the date and time of export, the location of the file, and the number of files exported.

User Manual 780000102/19 241

Chapter 14

File management

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

– The table, countaining all the fibers information coming from the files of the active tab.

Filename

Header of the txt file

Recall of the Fiber Information displayed on the 8000 Base Unit

(except alarm status)

Fig. 127

Exemple of a directory exported in a txt file (open with Excel)

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

Go to the file explorer

Select the directory and/or the files to burn on the CD

Click on

Edit

Click on

Copy

Cut

If you cut the file(s) to save it to on the CD, they will not be on the

Base Unit anymore.

Click on

CD-R tools

242 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 14

File management

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

If the CD-Rom is a CD-RW with data to be erased first, click on

Erase CD-RW

, otherwise go to step

A dialog box request to confirm that you want to erase existing data.

Click

Yes

to continue

A new message is displayed to inform you that all data is being erased on the CD-RW.

Click on

Burn CD

Burn and Close CD

, according to whether you wish to close the session of your CD or not.

A new dialog box is displayed, asking you to check that the CD-Rom door is securely closed.

A message is displayed to indicate that you need to wait, the CD-

Rom is being burnt.

A last message appears a few minutes later to let you know that the

CD-Rom has now been successfully burnt Click on any key to remove the message.

You may now securely remove the CD-Rom.

User Manual 780000102/19 243

Chapter 14

File management

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

244 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 15

Macros

The macro function allows to store series of user actions, in order to play them back automatically.

The macro function is operational only while the Base Unit is used under the context of «fiber optic applications», meaning used with one of the following application selected: OTDR, OSA, CD, PMD, AP, LTS...

Actions in the

YSTEM

page will not be recorded.

A file macro may also be operational with no active modules, as long as

«Standalone results» for fiber optics is used, and concerned files are fiber optics files.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“Calling the Macro function” on page 246

–

“Macro recording” on page 246

–

“Default macro” on page 249

–

“Macro playback” on page 250

–

“Storing a macro” on page 251

User Manual 780000102/19 245

Chapter 15

Macros

Calling the Macro function

Calling the Macro function

This function is accessible via the button

CRIPT

, in the front of the Base

Unit.

10 various macros may be created and used.

Once you click on the button

CRIPT

, you see the list of all the 10 macro positions. Each number from 1 to 10, displays the name of the macro stored at that position, or displays «(Empty)» in case that particular spot is free.

Fig. 128

List of Macros

Macro recording

The Base Unit offers two different types of macro: Standard and File.

For both types, it is required to:

Select and activate all necessary modules before starting the macro recording

Never press the

YSTEM

key during macro recording

Standard macro

This macro type shall be used to automate functions or operation mode.

To create a new standard macro:

246 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 15

Macros

Macro recording

Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.

Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on Standard.

Click on the soft key

Learn

. You arrive directly to the Results page.

You can now see the icon at the top of the screen. You are now ready to record.

Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.

Click on

CRIPT

when you are done, and select

End Macro

. You macro has now been saved.

Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

NOTE

All events are recorded wether you use the Base Unit buttons, the soft keys, the touchscreen, a mouse, or an external keyboard.

NOTE

The speed of your actions is not really relevant. See "Macro playback" page 250

File macro

This macro type shall be used to perform a template for multiple files.

To create a new file macro:

Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.

Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on

File

Click on the soft key

Learn

. You arrive directly to the

ILE

page. You can read the message Load file to start learning at the top of the screen.

Select the file you want to work with to perform all actions.

Load and view the corresponding trace. You can now see the icon at the top of the screen indicating that you are ready now to record.

Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.

Click on

CRIPT

when you are done, and select

End Macro

. You macro has now been saved.

Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

Notes for standard macros also apply for file macros.

User Manual 780000102/19 247

Chapter 15

Macros

Macro recording

Adding interaction to your macro

You may insert in your macro, a special dialog box, a message or a pause. These features will be very useful to you. They will give you some time to switch to another fiber if necessary, let you play a macro to a partial state and stop, or simply just bring your attention after or before a specific action is performed.

To access all these features, click on

CRIPT

during the learning process of a macro, just like if it was done. Several soft keys will become available.

Inserting a dialog box

Click on the soft key

Insert Dialog Box

. The dialog box editor is displayed. Enter the content of your dialog box and press confirm when you are done.

Inserting a message

Click on the soft key

Insert Message

. The Message text editor is displayed. Enter the content of your message and press confirm when you are done.

NOTE

Dialog boxes and messages serve different purposes when the macro is played back. A message will just appear to bring your attention to a specific point and wait until you are ready to continue. A dialog box will give you the choice between continuing to play the macro, or aborting it, letting you partially play a macro in some cases.

Inserting a pause

Click on the soft key

Insert Pause

. This action will automatically make the macro wait for a user action.

NOTE

During playback, you can see the icon tered. Press any key to restart the playback.

when a pause is encoun-

Renaming a macro

Whether you just created a new macro or you wish to modify the name of an existing macro, you may edit the name and change it as much as you want.

Select the macro and select

Name

on the sub-menu.

Click on to open the text editor, and type your name.

Click on

Confirm

to accept your new name.

248 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 15

Macros

Default macro

The «Overwrite

Config.» setting

Both your actions and the actual configuration are saved when you create a new macro. So when you play a macro back, you have the choice between:

Playing all actions and keeping the actual configuration

Your actions are fairly independent of the configuration, and you don’t wish to modify the current configuration: set

Overwrite Config.

on No.

Playing all actions and restoring the original configuration

Your actions are very dependant of the configuration, for example in case you need to do some measurements where you wish to keep all the acquisition parameters the same: set

Overwrite Config.

on Yes. This setting will also allow to make sure all necessary modules are selected in the

YSTEM

page before the macro is started.

It is strongly recommended to use the second method where all configuration is restored before playing the macro. Only experienced users might decide to do otherwise for different reasons.

Replacing a macro

Select an existing macro and click on the soft key

Learn

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to overwrite the macro. Click Yes if you wish to continue.

Removing a macro

Select an existing macro and click on the soft key

Remove

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to delete the selected macro. Click

Yes

if you wish to continue.

Default macro

How to use the default macro

It is possible to set one macro as default. This is very useful if for example, you wish to perform one macro several times in a row. Double clicking on the button

CRIPT

will automatically play the default macro.

How to set a macro as default

Select

Default Macro

, and choose in the sub-menu, which macro you wish to set as default.

As an alternative, you may also select a macro and press the soft key

Set as default

User Manual 780000102/19 249

Chapter 15

Macros

Macro playback

Macro 2 is set as default

Alternatively, set any other macro as default using this button

Fig. 129

Default button

Macro playback

To play the default macro, you may directly double click on

CRIPT

To play another macro, go to the macro screen (Click on

CRIPT

once), and select the macro you wish to play. Then press the soft key

Play

During all the play back of the macro, you can see the icon top of the screen.

at the

NOTE

This icon changes to when the playback is suspended by a

pause

event, waiting for the user to restart the process (see "Inserting a pause" page 248

All actions recorded in your macro are now performed.

The speed of the playback is not the same as the speed of the recording. All actions except for acquisitions, will appear faster, but will remain slow enough to let you see what is currently performed. Acquisition times remain the same as during the recording.

250 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 15

Macros

Storing a macro

NOTE

Don’t forget to add interactive events during your macro recording if you need a pause, a specific message or simply to be able to abort the macro at a certain stage if necessary.

Touching a button on the Base Unit will automatically cause the macro playback to abort, except for restarting the playback, interrupted by a

pause

event.

NOTE

For a File macro, you may select several files before you call the

Macro function.

Script (specific option)

According the configuration of the MTS/T-BERD 8000, this one can be equipped with a Script function, available on the same page as the macro

page. To use the script, a MTAU module is mandatory, see “Use of the

Fiber Characterization script” on page 207 .

Storing a macro

The Base Unit lets you save macros as files on the hard disk or other storage media.

To store a macro, select it and click on the soft key Store. It will automatically store it in the current directory.

NOTE

If you wish to store your macro at a specific place on your storage media, make sure you use the file explorer to set that place as your current directory.

To reload this macro later on, go to the file explorer and load the file. The macro will automatically take the first available place in the list of your 10 macros.

The macro can not be loaded if no macro position is available.

User Manual 780000102/19 251

Chapter 15

Macros

Storing a macro

252 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

This chapter shows the technical specifications of the modules, of the

Base Unit, and options and accessories available.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“OTDR Modules” on page 254

–

“WDM Modules” on page 261

–

“PMD Modules” on page 262

–

“ODM Modules” on page 262

–

“ODM MR Modules” on page 263

–

“High Resolution Dispersion test solution” on page 265

–

“BBS Modules” on page 266

–

“Information on «fiber» modules 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4” on page 267

–

“MTAU modules” on page 267

–

“OFI modules” on page 268

–

“Warning” on page 269

User Manual 780000102/19 253

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

OTDR Modules

OTDR measurements characteristics

Distance measurement

– Dual cursor

– Distance displayed takes into account the calibration of the refractive index of the fiber.

– Refractve Index adjustable from 1.30000 to 1.70000 in steps of

0.00001

– Resolution of display : 1 cm max.

– Resolution of cursor : 1 cm max.

– Sampling resolution (distance between measurement points): from

4 cm, with up to 256 000 acquisition points .

– Accuracy : ± 1m ±10

-5 x distance ± sampling resolution



(excluding errors of calibration of refractive index of the fiber).

Attenuation measurement

– Dual cursor

– Display resolution: 0.001 dB

– Cursor resolution : 0.001 dB

– Linearity : ± 0.03 dB/dB

Reflectance measurement

– Display resolution: 0,01 dB

– Accuracy : ± 2 dB

Automatic measurement

– Automatic measurement of all the elements of the signal:Event

Distance / Event Loss / Event Reflectance / Section Loss and Attenuation / Optical Return Loss

– Slope measurement by least square averages or 2-point method.

– Display threshold of faults :

- 0 to 5.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB for event loss



- -11 to -99 dB in steps of 1 dB for reflectance



- 0 to 1.99 dB/km in steps of 0.001 dB/km for section slope.

Manual Measurement

– Attenuation between A & B cursors.

1.± 0,05 dB /dB for UHD modules

2.± 4 dB for UHD and VSRE modules

254 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

– Reflectance between A & B cursors.

– ORL between A & B cursors.

– Event loss using 2-point or 5-point method

OTDR measurement

– Weight : approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)

– Dimensions (in mm, without front panel) - w x h x d: 120 x 27 x 211

Technical specifications

The specifications provided below are valid wathever the number of wavelengths present in the module.



Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise indicated:

Multimode and Multi/Single mode modules

Central Wavelength

81xxMM

850

± 20 nm

1300

± 20 nm

850

± 20 nm

81xxSRL

1300

± 20 nm

1310/1550/1625

± 20 nm

Laser Classes - EN 60825-1,

Ed.1.2, 2001-08

Laser Classes - FDA21CFR§1040.10

Min. IEC Dynamic Range

RMS

Dynamic Range

Distance Range

Pulse width

Event Dead Zone

Attenuation dead zone

Continuous Wave Output Power

Modulated wave output power (Auto/

270/330/1kHz/2 kHz)

Class 1M Class 1 Class 1M Class 1 Class 1M

20 dB

25 dB

Class 1

18 dB

23 dB

Up to 80 km

20 dB

24 dB

18 dB

24 dB

Up to 80 km

Class 1M

36 / 33.5 / 33.5 dB

41 / 40

/ 39 dB

Up to 380 km

3 ns to 200 ns

1.5 m

5 m

3 ns to 300 ns

0.5 m

2 m

3 ns to 20 µs

0.8 m

4 m

- 3.5 dBm

- 6.5 dBm

1. Guaranteed with laser at 50 ns.

2. +/- 10 nm at 1625 nm

3. Guaranteed with laser at 10 µs

4. Guaranteed value corresponding to the one-way difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the fiber and the level containing 98% of noise, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth (according to IEC 61749 standard).

5. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the fiber and the RMS noise level, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

6. In single wavelength configuration

7. Measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event with the shortest pulsewidth

8. Measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/UPC, with the shortest pulsewidth.

9. Not available for E8156SRL

User Manual 780000102/19 255

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

Singlemode modules

Modules

Ultra High

Dynamic Long distance

81xx UHD

Very Long Range Long Range

Medium

Range

Very Short

Range

Central Wavelength

Laser Classes - EN

60825-1, Ed. 1.2,

2001-08

1310 ± 20 nm

1550 ± 20 nm

1625 ± 10 nm

- Class 1M @

1310 nm

- Class 1 @

1550/1625 nm

81xx VLR

1310 ± 20 nm

1383 ± 2 nm

1490 ± 15 nm

1550 ± 20 nm

1625 ± 10 nm

- Class [email protected]

1310/1383 nm

- Class 1 @ 1490/

1550/1625 nm

81xx LR

1310 ± 20 nm

1490 ± 15 nm

1550 ± 20 nm

1625 ± 10 nm

1650 ± 5 nm

- Class 1M @

1310 nm

- Class 1 @

1490/1550/

1625/1650 nm

81xx MR

1310 ± 20 nm

1490 ± 15 nm

1550 ± 20 nm

1625 ± 10 nm

1310 ± 20 nm

1550 ± 20 nm

Class 1

81xxVSRE

Class 1

Laser Classes -

EFDA21CFR§1040.10

Class 1

Min. IEC Dynamic

Range

RMS Dynamic Range

Distance Range

Pulse width

Event Dead Zone

Attenuation Dead Zone

Continuous Wave Output Power

Modulated wave output power (Auto, 270/330/

1kHz/2 kHz)

42 dB

45 dB

42 dB

45.5 dB

50 dB

45.5 dB up to 380 km

10 ns to 20

s

4,5 m

15 m

40dB

39 dB

37 dB

38.5 dB

38 dB

45 db

44 dB

42 dB

43 db

42 dB up to 380 km

3ns to 20 µs

0,8 m

4 m

0 dBm

-3 dBm

39 dB

37 dB

38 dB

43 dB

40 dB

41 dB

42 dB

36 dB

33,5 dB

41 dB

40 dB

39 dB

28 dB

26,5 dB

32 dB

30 dB up to 380 km up to 380 km up to 260 km

3 ns to 20 µs

0.8 m

4 m

0 dBm

-3 dBm

3 ns to 20 µs 10 ns to 10 µs

0.8 m

4 m

-3.5 dBm

-6.5 dBm

2,20 m

8 m

-3.5 dBm

-6.5 dBm

1. Guaranteed, with laser at 10

s

2. Guaranteed value corresponding to the one-way difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the fiber and the level containing 98% of noise, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth (according to IEC 61749 standard).

3. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

4. at 20

s pulse width with Non Zero Dispersion Shifted Fibers in single wavelength configuration.

5. In single wavelength configuration

6. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.

7. at 1310 nm

8. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/UPC (-55 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

256 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

Singlemode UHR modules 8118UHR

Spacing of measurement points

Central Wavelength

RMS Dynamic Range

Distance Range from 4 cm, with up to 512 000 acquisition points

1650 ± 5 nm

43 dB

Up to 380km

Pulse width

Event Dead Zone

3ns to 20 µs

Attenuation Dead Zone

1.5

Laser safety Class Class 1

1. Guaranteed with laser at 10 µs

2. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.

4. Guaranteed up to 40 km, including Chromatic Dispersion of the Laser.

5. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance type FC/UPC (-55 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

Singlemode CWDM modules 81xxCWDM 81xxCWDM

Central Wavelength

Min. IEC Dynamic Range

RMS Dynamic Range

1551 ± 5 nm

1571 ± 5 nm

1591 ± 5 nm

1611 ± 5 nm

39 dB

42dB

1471 ± 5 nm

1491 ± 5 nm

1511 ± 5 nm

1531 ± 5 nm

39 dB

42dB

Distance Range up to 380 km

Pulse width 3ns to 20 µs

Event Dead Zone

Attenuation Dead Zone

Laser safety Class (21 CFR)

Continuous Wave Output Power

Class 1

-3.5 dBm

User Manual 780000102/19 257

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

Singlemode CWDM modules

Modulated wave output power (Auto,

270/330/1 kHz/2 kHz)

81xxCWDM 81xxCWDM

-6.5 dBm

1. Guaranteed, with laser at 10 µs

2. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.

4. ADZ measured at ± 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance type FC/UPC (-55 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

Distance

Ranges

Ranges for MM modules

0.5 km

1 km

2 km

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

3 ns

x x x x x x

20 ns

x x x x x x x

50 ns

x x x x x x x

200 ns

x x x x x x x

0.5 km

1 km

2 km

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

Ranges for SRL Multimode modules

30 ns 3 ns

x x x x x

10 ns

x x x x x x x x x x x

100 ns 300 ns

x x x x x x x x x x x

258 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

Ranges for UHD modules

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

140 km

260 km

380 km

10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1

s

s 10 s 20 s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

1 km

2 km

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

160 km

260 km

Ranges for LR / VLR / MR / SRL Singlemode modules

2 km

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

140 km

260 km

380 km

3 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1

s

s x x x x x x x x x x x x

1. Available only with LR Modules x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Ranges for VSRE modules

100 ns 300 ns 1

s

10 ns 30 ns

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

s x x x x x

s x x x x

User Manual 780000102/19 259

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OTDR Modules

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

140 km

260 km

380 km

5 km

10 km

20 km

40 km

80 km

140 km

260 km

380 km

Ranges for UHR modules

3 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1

s

s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Ranges for CWDM modules

3 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1

s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

s

s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

260 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

WDM Modules

WDM Modules

Typical specifications

Typical specifications, at 25°C, unless otherwise indicated

81WDM Module

S+C+L

81WDMPMD Module

O+E+S+C+L

Wavelength

Range

Duration of sweep (in real time)

Accuracy

Resolution of display

Minimum interval between channels

Optical Bandwidth (FWHM)

Power

Range of display

Resolution of display

Channel measurement range

Noise floor

Max. permissible power, before signal cut off:

- total

- per channel

Accuracy in power

Linearity

Flatness

Dependence on polarization

ORL (Optical Return Loss)

ORR (Optical Rejection Ratio)

1485-1640 nm

1.5 s

± 10 pm

1 pm

30 pm

0,01 dB

-86 dBm

1260-1640 nm

10 GHz (80 pm)

- 90 dBm at + 30 dBm

- 79 dBm at + 10 dBm

+ 20 dBm

+ 10 dBm

± 0,5 dB max

± 0,2 dB

± 0,15 dB ± 0,05 dB

35 dB

35 dB at 50 GHz from the carrier

40 dB at 100 GHz from the carrier

1. From -40 dBm to +5 dBm, in the range of 1525-1620 nm

2. In the range of 1525-1570 nm

3. @ 1550 nm, with averaging, -75 dBm without averaging

4. @ 1550 nm, with averaging, -81 dBm without averaging

5. At -30 dBm and 1550 nm, excluding the uncertainty relating to the input connector .

6. @ 1590 nm from 0 to -40 dBm

7. In the range of 1525 nm - 1620 nm (reference : 1550 nm)

8. On the basis of the peak of a single carrier, on the band 1530 - 1605 nm, at 0 dBm & with max. resolution

Dimensions and weight

– Weight : approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)

– Dimensions (in mm) : Width : 120 / Height :27 / Length : 211

User Manual 780000102/19 261

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

PMD Modules

PMD Modules

Modules

Measurement time

Dynamic range

Measurement range

2, 3

Type B Uncertainty

Typical values, at 25°C, unless specified otherwise.

E81PMD 81WDMPMD

6 seconds (independent of the PMD value)

Up to 58 dB

6 seconds (independent of the PMD value)

Up to 45 dB

0.080 ps to 130 ps 0.080 ps to 60 ps

± 0.020 ps / + 2% PMD

1. Without averaging

2. Up to 150 ps for weak coupling

3. Traceable to NPL standard

4. Weak coupling from 0.1 ps to 60 ps PMD range

ODM Modules

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Chromatic Dispersion (E81CD/E81DISPAP)

Wavelength Acquisition Range

Wavelength Uncertainty

Minimum length

Dynamic Range

Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty

Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability

Dispersion Uncertainty

4, 5

Dispersion Repeatability

3, 4

Slope at Zero Wavelength Repeatability

Measurement Time

80km G652 10km G655

1260 - 1640 nm

+/- 0.1 nm

1 km

45 dB

55 dB

+/- 1.5 nm

0.1 nm

+/- 0.05 ps/nm.km

+/- 0.1 ps/nm.km

0.5%

0.005ps/nm.km

0.1%

From 40s to 80s

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified

2. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode

3. Repeatibility refers to the typical one-sigma standard deviation value, obtained for system cycling over

20 measurements

4. 1530-1570nm band

5. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

262 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

ODM MR Modules

Polarization Mode Dispersion (E81DISPAP)

Dynamic Range

PMD Measurement range

PMD Type B uncertainty

5, 6

PMD Repeatability

5, 6

Measurement Time

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified

2. With averaging

3. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode

4. Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling

5. Weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps PMD range, up to 35 dB Total Loss

6. Traceable to NPL standard

7. Minimum value without averaging

58 dB

65 dB

0.08 to 130 ps

+/- 0.02 ps +/- 2% PMD

0.025 ps

16 seconds, independant of PMD value

Attenuation Profile (E81DISPAP)

Dynamic Range

Measurement Uncertainty

(80 km fiber G652)

Measurement Time

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified

2. With averaging

3. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode

4. Minimum value without averaging

55 dB

60 dB

+/-0.006dB/km @1310nm

+/-0.003dB/km @1550nm

+/-0.004dB/km @1625nm

6 seconds

ODM MR Modules

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Chromatic Dispersion (E81MRDISPAP)

Wavelength Acquisition Range

Wavelength Display Range

Wavelength Uncertainty

Minimum length

Dynamic Range

80km G652 10km G655

1435 - 1640 nm

1260 - 1640 nm

+/- 0.1 nm

1 km

33 dB

User Manual 780000102/19 263

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

ODM MR Modules

Chromatic Dispersion (E81MRDISPAP)

Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty

Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability

Dispersion Uncertainty

3,4

Dispersion Repeatability

2,3

Measurement Time

80km G652

n/a n/a

+/- 0.06 ps/nm.km

10km G655

0.02 ps/nm.km

+/- 4.5 nm

0.4 nm

+/- 0.3 ps/nm.km

From 10s to 30s

1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)

2. Repeatibility refers to the typical one-sigma standard deviation value, obtained for system cycling over 20 measurements

3. 1530-1570nm band

4. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

Polarization Mode Dispersion (E81MRDISPAP)

Dynamic Range

PMD Measurement range

PMD Type B uncertainty

4, 5

PMD Repeatability

4, 5

Measurement Time

1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)

2. With averaging

3. Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling

4. Weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps PMD range, up to 35 dB Total Loss

5. Traceable to NPL standard

6. Minimum value without averaging

45 dB

0.08 to 130 ps

+/- 0.02 ps +/- 2% PMD

0.025 ps

8 seconds, independant of PMD value

Attenuation Profile (E81MRDISPAP)

Dynamic Range

Wavelength Uncertainty

Measurement uncertainty

Measurement Time

1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)

2. Measured with 80km G.652 fiber

45 dB

+/-0.1 nm

+/-0.003dB/km @1550nm

+/-0.004dB/km @1625nm

3 seconds

264 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

High Resolution Dispersion test solution

High Resolution Dispersion test solution

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Optical Interfaces

Applicable Fiber SMF 9/125 µm

Interchangeable optical connectors FC, SC, DIN, LC

Weight / Dimensions (w x h x d)

Weight

Dimensions (w x h x d)

600 g (1.32Ibs)

213 x 124 x 32 mm (8.36 x 4.88 x 1.26 in)

Polarization Mode Dispersion

Dynamic Range

1,2

PMD measurement range

PMD absolute uncertainty

4,5

Measurement time

48 dB

0 to 18 ps

+/- 0.02 ps +/- 2%

From 30 s.

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode

2. With Kit 1 (PMD only). Subtract 6 dB for Kit 2 (PMD / CD / AP)

3. With strong mode coupling

4. Strong mode coupling. 1500-1600nm measurement span. PMD < 10ps

5. Up to 35 dB attenuation

6. Without averaging

Attenuation profile (with kit 2)

Dynamic Range

1,2

Wavelength Uncertainty

Measurement Time

Measurement uncertainty

- at 1550 nm

- at 1625 nm

45 dB

+/- 0.1 nm

6 seconds

+/- 0.003 dB/km

+/- 0.004 dB/km

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode

2. With averaging

3. Without averaging

4. Measured with 80 km G.652 fiber

User Manual 780000102/19 265

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

BBS Modules

Chromatic Dispersion (with kit 2)

Wavelength Acquisition Range

Wavelength Uncertainty

Minimum length

Dynamic Range

1,2

Measurement Time

1260 - 1640 nm

+/- 0.1 nm

1 km

33 dB

40s. to 80s.

Zero Dispersion wavelength uncertainty

Zero Dispersion wavelength repeatability

Dispersion uncertainty

4, 5

Dispersion repeatability

3, 4

80km G652

n/a n/a

+/- 0.06 ps/nm.km

0.02 ps/nm.km

10km G655

+/- 4.5 nm

0.4 nm

+/- 0.3 ps/nm.km

0.02 ps/nm.km

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode

2. Dynamic range obtained without PSM module. A typical extra budget loss of 1.25dB applies when passing through PSM

3. Repeatability refers to the typical one sigma standard deviation value, obtained for systems cycling of 20 measurements

4. 1530−1570 nm band

5. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

BBS Modules

Specifications, at 25°C, unless otherwise mentioned.

81BBS2A

Wavelength range

Minimum spectral density

Typical Output power

Power consumption

Operating temperature range

Laser Class

1. over 1260 - 1630 nm wavelength range, AP mode

2. over 1470 - 1630 nm wavelength range

3. Under the IEC 60825-1: 2001 international standard

81BBS1A

1260 - 1640 nm

-40 dBm / 0,1 nm

+12.5 dBm

1460 - 1640 nm

-40 dBm / 0,1 nm

+11 dBm

10 Wh

-5 to +40°C

266 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

Information on «fiber» modules 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4

Information on «fiber» modules 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4

82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 modules contain one reel of singlemode fiber with two jumpers, to be used as a launch or receive cable with an OTDR.

These modules can also be used for demonstration and training purpose.

NOTE

As these modules are not test instruments, they are not supplied with a certificate of calibration.

82LFSM2 82LFSM4

Type of fiber used Corning SMF 28 or SMF 28e

Recommended group index 1.4677 @ 1310nm and 1.4682 @ 1550/1625nm

Fiber length

Connectors Attenuation

2 km -0.02/+0.11 km 4 km -0.03/+0.21 km

< 0.5 dB

1. Connectors cleaned, in good conditions

MTAU modules

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Wavelength range

Insertion Loss (max)

Return Loss (max)

PDL

(max)

Repeatability

(max)

1. Polarization Dependent Loss

2. At constant temperature and polarization

81MTAU2 81MTAU4

1 dB

1260 - 1640 nm

1.5 dB

50 dB

0.1 dB

0.01 dB

User Manual 780000102/19 267

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

OFI modules

OFI modules

Bi-directional loss specifications.

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

NOTE

This applies to the 81xx OFI modules.

To ensure optimal use (bi-directional measurement and communication), two units are required.

Source function (also valid for source mode)

Laser type

Central wavelength

Nominal output level into 9/125 µm fiber (CW mode)

Modulated output level

Level stability

Short term 15 min (

T = +/- 0.3 K)

Long term 8 hours (

T = +/- 3 K)

1. After 15 min warm up

81xx OFI Module

Class 1

1310+/-20 nm

1490+/-3 nm

1550+/-30 nm

1625+/-5 nm

- 3.5 dBm

3 dB lower

+/- 0.02 dB

+/- 0.2 dB

Bidirectional loss function

(FOX port)

Dynamic range

Accuracy

Loop back

Side-by-side

Display resolution

Type of detector

Type of fiber

Precision of length measurement

1. After 15 minutes warm up.

81xx OFI Module

60 dB

+/-0.25 dB without optical connection uncertainty

+/-0.15 dB without optical connection uncertainty

0.01 dB

InGaAs

9 µm

+/- 1.5% (3 to 200 km)

268 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

Warning

Optical Return Loss

ORL measurement display range

Display resolution

Accuracy

81xx OFI Module

Up to 65 dB

For wavelengths 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm:

- 60 dB with APC connector type

0.01 dB

+/- 0,5 dB typical (from +14 to 50 dB with APC connector)

Standalone power meter

Standalone powermeter

Wavelength range (adjustable per 1 nm)

800 to 1650 nm

81xx OFI Module

Selectable wavelength

Auto-

detection (if signals are emitted by a JDSU source)

Detected modulation

850 / 980 / 1300 / 1310 / 1420 / 1450 / 1480 / 1490 / 1510 /

1550 / 1625 nm and one user-defined

850 / 1310 / 1490 / 1550 / 1625 nm

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

Power Level

Display range

Accuracy

Detector type

Display resolution

Type of fiber

Standard High Power

+10 to -60 dBm

+/- 0.2 dB

(+5 dBm to -50 dBm)

+26 to -55 dBm

+/- 0.25 dB

(+23 dBm to -50 dBm)

0,01 dB

Filtered InGaAs, 2 mm

9 µm to 50 µm

Warning

Warning for 81WDM, 81PMD, 81WDMPMD, UHD and VLR modules:

These are class A products. In a domestic environment, theses products may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

User Manual 780000102/19 269

Chapter 16

Technical specifications

Warning

270 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

This chapter describes all the accessories and options available with the

MTS / T-BERD series.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

–

“References of measurement plug-ins” on page 272

–

“User manual references” on page 276

–

“References of optical connectors and adapters” on page 276

–

“References of result processing software” on page 278

User Manual 780000102/19 271

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of measurement plug-ins

References of measurement plug-ins

OTDR Modules

Multimode Module

Multimode modules

Multimode High Resolution 850/1300 nm

Short Range LAN 25dB 850 nm

Short Range LAN 23 dB 1300 nm

Short Range LAN 25/23 dB 850/1300 nm

Reference

E8123MM

E8111SRL

E8112SRL

E8123SRL

Modal Controller for Multimode fiber

Encircled flux mode conditioner embedded in a patchord for 50µm multimode fiber in FC/PC

Encircled flux mode conditioner embedded in a patchord for 50µm multimode fiber in SC/PC

References

EFJEF50CONFCPC

EFJEF50CONSCPC

Singlemode Module

UHD modules

Ultra long distance 1550 nm

Ultra long distance 1310/1550 nm

Ultra long distance 1550/1625 nm

Ultra long distance 1310/1550/1625 nm

OTDR modules for calibration reports

OTDR plug-in for calibration ratios

VLR modules

Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR module with filter

Very Long Range 42 dB 1490 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 43 dB 1550 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 44 dB 1383 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 45 dB 1310 nm OTDR module

Reference

E8115UHD

E8126UHD

E8129UHD

E8136UHD

Reference

E81OTDRCR

Reference

E8117VLR

E8117RVLR

E8118VLR49

E8115VLR

E8118VLR38

E8114VLR

272 User Manual 780000102/19

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of measurement plug-ins

VLR modules

Very Long Range 43/42 dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 45/43 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 45/43/42 dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 45/42/43 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR module

Very Long Range 45/44/43/42 dB 1310/1383/1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Reference

E8129VLR

E8126VLR

E8136VLR

E8138VLR49

E8148VLR38

LR modules

Long Range 40 dB 1490 nm OTDR module

Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR module with filter

Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR module

Long Range 41 dB 1550 nm OTDR module

Long Range 43 dB 1310 nm OTDR module

Long Range 43/41/42 dB 1310/1550/1650 nm OTDR module

Long Range 42 dB Filtered 1650 nm OTDR module

Long Range 41/41 dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Long Range 43/41 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR module

Long Range 43/40/41 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR module

Long Range 43/41/41 dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Source Option for OTDR singlemode modules

Source Option for Singlemode modules

1. Not available with UHD and SR(e) plug-ins

Reference

E8118LR49

E8117RLR

E8117LR

E8115LR

E8114LR

E8138LR65

E8118RLR65

E8129LR

E8126LR

E8138LR49

E8136LR

Reference

E81OTDRLS

MR modules

Medium range 37dB 1625 nm OTDR module

Medium range 38 dB 1550 nm OTDR module

Medium range 40 dB 1310 nm OTDR module

Medium range 38/37dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Medium range 40/38 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR module

Medium range 40/38/37dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR module

Medium range 40/40/39 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR module

Reference

E8117MR

E8115MR

E8114MR

E8129MR

E8126MR

E8136MR

E8138MR49

User Manual 780000102/19 273

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of measurement plug-ins

VSRE modules

Low range 26 dB 1550 nm OTDR module

Low range 28/26 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR module

Reference

E8115VSRE

E8126VSRE

SRL Singlemode/Multimode modules

Short Range LAN 25/23/40/38 dB 850/1300/1310/1550 nm OTDR module

Short Range LAN 25/23/40/38/37 dB 850/1300/1310/1550/1625 nm

OTDR module

Reference

E8146SRL

E8156SRL

UHR plug-ins

Ultra High Resolution Filtered 1650 nm OTDR plug-in

Reference

E8118RUHR65

Patch cords for MR, LR and VLR modules

1625 nm bandpass filter integrated in a 3m patch cord (SC/PC)

1625 nm bandpass filter integrated in a 3m patch cord (FC/PC)

1625 nm bandpass filter integrated in a 3m patch cord (SC/APC)

1625 nm bandpass filter integrated in a 3m patch cord (FC/APC)

CWDM modules

CWDM OTDR plug-in module 1551/1571/1591/1611nm with inservice testing capability

CWDM OTDR plug-in module 1471/1491/1511/1531nm with inservice testing capability

CWDM OTDR plug-in module 1271/1291/1311/1331nm with inservice testing capability

Source Option for CWDM OTDR

Source Option for CWDM OTDR plug-ins

References

EFJ1625FPCSC

EFJ1625FPCFC

EFJ1625FAPCSC

EFJ1625FAPCFC

Reference

E8140OTDRCWDM1

E8140OTDRCWDM2

E8140OTDRCWDM5

Reference

E81OTDRLS

WDM / PMD

Modules

PMD modules

PMD Plug-in Band S+C+L

274 User Manual 780000102/19

Reference

E81PMD

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of measurement plug-ins

PMD modules

PMD + AP + WDM plug-in Band O+E+S+C+L

WDM modules

WDM plug-in Band S+C+L

PMD accessories

Polarization Scrambler Module

Optical variable polarizer (not necessary for 81XXX plug-ins)

Broadband source for PMD, AP and CD measurements

Reference

E81WDMPMD

Reference

E81WDM

Reference

E81PSM

EOVP-15

EOBS550

ODM Module

ODM modules

Reference

Combined long range CD, PMD & AP measurement-1260/1640 nm E81DISPAP

Long Range Chromatic Dispersion Module - 1260 - 1640 nm

ODM MR Medium Range plug-in

E81CD

E81MRDISPAP

1. To be used with an broadband source.

2. To be used with the Broadband Source: EOBS500

BBS Modules

BBS modules Reference

BroadBand Source module for standard PMD/AP/CD, 1260-1640nm E81BBS2A

SCL-Band BroadBand Source plug-in Module for standard PMD,

High Resolution PMD, CD and AP measurements

E81BB1A

MTAU Modules

MTAU modules, 8100 series

Multi Test Access Unit for 4 test modules

1. Connector type must be specified.

Reference

E81MTAU4

User Manual 780000102/19 275

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

User manual references

OFI Modules

OFI modules

1310/1550nm OFI plug-in module - standard power

1310/1550nm OFI plug-in module - high power

1310/1550/1625nm OFI plug-in module - standard power

1310/1550/1625nm OFI plug-in module - high power

1310/1490/1550nm OFI plug-in module - standard power

1310/1490/1550nm OFI plug-in module - high power

OFI Module option

ORL option for OFI plug-in module with mandrel

Reference

E8126OFI1

E8126OFI2

E8136OFI1

E8136OFI2

E8132OFI1

E8132OFI2

Reference

E81OFIORL

Launch Fiber

Modules

Launch fiber modules for OTDR demo and test

Launch cable singlemode (1 fiber G652 - 2km)

Launch cable singlemode (1 fiber G652 - 4 km)

Reference

E82LFSM2

E82LFSM4

1. Two optical connectors must be specified when ordering each launch fiber module.

User manual references

User manuals for MTS/T-BERD modules

User manual for modules, 8100 series (French)

User manual for modules, 8100 series (English)

User manual for modules, 8100 series (German)

Reference

E8100M01

E8100M02

E8100M03

References of optical connectors and adapters

Front Panel interchangeable Optical connectors for Multimode SRL OTDR

Universal PC Connector with FC adapter

276 User Manual 780000102/19

Reference

EUNIPCFCMM

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of optical connectors and adapters

Front Panel interchangeable Optical connectors for Multimode SRL OTDR

Universal PC Connector with SC adapter

Universal PC Connector with ST adapter

Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter

Reference

EUNIPCSCMM

EUNIPCSTMM

EUNIPCDINMM

Front Panel interchangeable Optical Connectors for Singlemode OTDR and ODM Modules

Universal PC Connector with FC adapter

Universal PC Connector with SC adapter

Universal PC Connector with ST adapter

Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter

Universal PC Connector with LC adapter

Universal APC Connector for SM only with FC adapter

Universal APC Connector for SM only with SC adapter

Universal APC Connector for SM only with ST adapter

Universal APC Connector for SM only with DIN adapter

Universal APC Connector for SM only with LC adapter

Reference

EUNIPCFC

EUNIPCSC

EUNIPCST

EUNIPCDIN

EUNIPCLC

EUNIAPCFC

EUNIAPCSC

EUNIAPCST

EUNIAPCDIN

EUNIAPCLC

1. A connector (fixed or universal) must be specified at time of order of the plug-in

Additional Adapters for Universal Connectors

Universal FC Adapter

Universal SC Adapter

Universal ST Adapter

Universal DIN Adapter

Universal LC adapter

1. Interchangeable in the field

Reference

EUFCAD

EUSCAD

EUSTAD

EUDINAD

EULCAD

User Manual 780000102/19 277

Chapter 17

Options and accessories

References of result processing software

References of result processing software

Optical Fiber Trace software

Optical Fiber Trace software (5 licences)

Optical Fiber Trace software (site licence)

FiberTrace software - update

Optical Fiber Cable software

Optical Fiber Cable software (5 licences)

Optical Fiber Cable software (site licence)

Reference

EOFS100

EOFS1005L

EOFS100SL

EOFS100UP

EOFS200

EOFS2005L

EOFS200SL

278

1.Free software updates on the Web (but without user manual)

User Manual 780000102/19

Appendix A

RoHS Information

This appendix describes the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) information, which are mandatory requirements from China.

The RoHS directive consists in the restriction on the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical or electronic equipment sold or used in the European Union, after July 1, 2006. These substances are: lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polyubrominated biphenyls, and polybrominated diphenyl ethers.

The follwoing chapters are described:

–

“Concerned products: 8100 modules series” on page 280

–

“Concerned products: OTDR 8100 Modules Series” on page 281

–

“Concerned products: All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series” on page 282

–

“Concerned products: PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series” on page 283

User Manual 780000102/19 279

Appendix A

RoHS Information

Concerned products: 8100 modules series

Concerned products: 8100 modules series

Nb 8000 series

“ C h i n a R o H S ”

电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第

39 号）

此附录提供

”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。

产品名称：

XXXXXX

环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质

（详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。

正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册

生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式

部件名称铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg)

有毒有害物质或元素

镉 (Cd) 六价铬 (CR

) 多溴联苯 (PBB)

主机

附件

印刷电路板

内部布线

显示屏

键盘

电池

电源单元

机电部件

硬盘

光模块

金属外壳部件和夹具

塑料外壳部件

标签

外部电缆和适配器

光驱

操作手册和印刷资料

软包和硬包

其他附件

O O

X O

: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006.

: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

多溴二苯醚

(PBDE)

280 User Manual 780000102/19

Appendix A

RoHS Information

Concerned products: OTDR 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products: OTDR 8100 Modules Series

8111MM, 8112MM, 8114(DR/HD/UHD/VHD), 8115(DR/HD/UHD/VHD),

8117(HD/HD-RC/VHD/VHD-RC), 8123MM, 8126(DR/HD/UHD/VHD),

8129(UHD/VHD), 8136(HD/UHD), 81BBS(1/2), 815MTAU(2/3),

82PRINTER

“China RoHS”

电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第

39 号）

此附录提供

”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主机和它

的附件。

产品名称：

XXXXXX

环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质

（详细信息见下

表）

主机

部件名称

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有毒有害

物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。

正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册

生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式

铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg)

有毒有害物质或元素

镉 (Cd) 六价铬 (CR

) 多溴联苯 (PBB)

O O O O O

多溴二苯醚

(PBDE)

印刷电路板

内部布线

显示屏

X O O O

O O O O

键盘

电池

电源单元

机电部件

硬盘

光模块

金属外壳部件和夹具

塑料外壳部件

标签

O O O O

附件

外部电缆和适配器

O O O O

光驱

操作手册和印刷资料

O O O O

软包和硬包

其他附件

O O O O

: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006.

: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

User Manual 780000102/19 281

Appendix A

RoHS Information

Concerned products: All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products: All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series

8118 VLR(24/38/45/48/49/65), 8118R VLR65, 8128 VLR65, 8138

VLR(24/38/49), 8148 VLR(24/38/49)

“ C h i n a R o H S ”

电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第

39 号）

此附录提供

”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。

产品名称：

XXXXXX

环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质

（详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。

正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册

生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式

部件名称铅

(Pb)

汞

(Hg)

有毒有害物质或元素

镉

(Cd)

六价铬

(CR

)

多溴联苯

(PBB)

主机

附件

印刷电路板

内部布线

显示屏

键盘

电池

电源单元

机电部件

硬盘

光模块

金属外壳部件和夹具

塑料外壳部件

标签

外部电缆和适配器

光驱

操作手册和印刷资料

软包和硬包

其他附件

O O

: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006.

: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

多溴二苯醚

(PBDE)

282 User Manual 780000102/19

Appendix A

RoHS Information

Concerned products: PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products: PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

81PMD, 81WDM, 81WDMPMD

“ C h i n a R o H S ”

电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第

39 号）

此附录提供

”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。

产品名称：

XXXXXX

环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质

（详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。

正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册

生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式

部件名称铅

(Pb)

汞

(Hg)

有毒有害物质或元素

镉

(Cd)

六价铬

(CR

)

多溴联苯

(PBB)

主机

附件

印刷电路板

内部布线

显示屏

键盘

电池

电源单元

机电部件

硬盘

光模块

金属外壳部件和夹具

塑料外壳部件

标签

外部电缆和适配器

光驱

操作手册和印刷资料

软包和硬包

其他附件

O O

X O

O O

: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006.

: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

多溴二苯醚

(PBDE)

User Manual 780000102/19 283

Appendix A

RoHS Information

Concerned products: PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

284 User Manual 780000102/19

Index

principle of measurement

A

Accessories

271

Adapter reference

276

switch

types

Attenuation

results table

160

179

Attenuation profile acquisition parameters

151

measurement

154

measurement parameters

152

measurement procedure

157

results display

158

B

Backscatter coefficient

Battery on microprocessor board

BBS activation

214

function

214

remote interlock connector

215

Bend

Bi-directionnal OTDR

User Manual 780000102/19

C

CD acquisition parameters

166

Configuration

164

results sreen parameters

167

CD ODM

Acquisition

172

Configuration

164

File Management

176

Reference Measurement

169

Results

174

CD-ROM burning

233

Channel filtering (OSA)

117

Coefficient of reflection

Commands external keyboard

Connectors references

276

Cursor

2 cursors method

5 cursors method

movement

resolution

selection

285

Index

I

D

Data transfer

233

DFB analysis

configuration

123

measurements

123

results

124

Distance specif. OTDR measurement

L

Launch Cable Start

Link End connector

Link length

Link Start connector

Lower & upper thresholds (OFI)

182

E

EDFA configuration

measurement

results

Event macro

Event OTDR

icons

External Keyboard

F

Fault Locator principle

Fibers standards

File configuration

218

expedition

227

naming

219

G

Ghosts

Index of refraction specifications

M

Macro adding interaction

calling

Default

File

overwrite

Playback

recording

renaming

Standard

Mail file expedition

OFI,FOX function

Markers (OTDR)

addition

delete

hints

representation

Measurement attenuation (specif.)

distance (specif.)

principle

Memory

see File

Modules

CD (specif.)

fibers

MTAU (specif.)

OTDR range

PMD (specif.)

WDM (specif.)

MTAU auto mode

configuration

manual mode

sequence test configuration

205

User Manual 780000102/19 286

Index perform

206

O

OFI

Attenuator ext. (powermeter)

FOX

configuration

distant module

measurement acquisition

results display

send message

taking ref. loss

taking ref. ORL

LTS

Zero adjustment ORL

192

attenuation measurement

179

Configuration

Connection

insertion loss measurement

power measurement

source configuration

Manual ORL

Measurement acquisition

197

reference

197

results

198

Power meter measurements

186

ref. measurement

185

zero setting

185

Source

Unit connection